- Computers & electronics
- Computer components
- System components
- Processors
- Roland
- AR-3000
- Owner's manual
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
152
OWNER’S MANUAL Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: "IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS" (p. 2), "USING THE UNIT SAFELY" (p. 3, 4), and "IMPORTANT NOTES" (p. 5, 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, OWNER’S MANUAL should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference. Copyright © 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with a damp cloth. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table except as specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. For the U.K. IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. BLUE: NEUTRAL BROWN: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger. Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly. Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly. * Material damage refers other adverse effects respect to the home furnishings, as well animals or pets. The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled. to damage or caused with and all its to domestic The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet. 006 001 • Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual. .......................................................................................................... 002b • Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit. (The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user-installable options; see p. 15.) .......................................................................................................... 003 • Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it (except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page. .......................................................................................................... 004 • Never use or store the unit in places that are: • Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are • Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are • Humid; or are • Exposed to rain; or are • Dusty; or are • Subject to high levels of vibration. .......................................................................................................... 005 • This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is recommended by Roland. • When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended by Roland, the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or stand, you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit, and keep it from wobbling. .......................................................................................................... 008a • The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the unit. .......................................................................................................... 009 • Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards! .......................................................................................................... 010 • This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist. .......................................................................................................... 011 • Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit. .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... 013 • In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit. .......................................................................................................... 3 014 • Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!) .......................................................................................................... 015 • Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cords—the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through. .......................................................................................................... 016 • Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page. .......................................................................................................... 022a • Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the option board. .......................................................................................................... 101a • The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. .......................................................................................................... 102b • Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. .......................................................................................................... 104 • Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children. .......................................................................................................... 106 • Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit. .......................................................................................................... 107b • Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. .......................................................................................................... 108a • Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices. .......................................................................................................... 109a • Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet. .......................................................................................................... 110a • Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet. .......................................................................................................... 115a • Install only the specified option boards (model no. AR-NT1). Remove only the specified screws (p. 15). .......................................................................................................... 118 • Should you remove the screws, make sure to put them in a safe place out of children's reach, so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally. .......................................................................................................... 4 IMPORTANT NOTES 291b In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2 and 3, please read and observe the following: Power Supply 301 • Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or variable lighting system). 307 • Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices. Placement 351 • Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference. 352 • This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers. 354a • Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit. 355 • To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a wet area, such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture. Maintenance 401a • For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth. 402 • Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation. Additional Precautions 553 • Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions. 554 • Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. 555 • A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal operation. 556 • When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements. 557 • A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation. 558a • To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night). 559a • When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials. 562 • Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some other make of connection cable, please note the following precautions. • Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable. • Combined use of a control timer or similar device was assumed when the time management features of this unit were designed. If intending to carry out playback that requires precise time management, the unit should be used in combination with a control timer or similar device. 551 eiyakuchuu! • Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit’s memory on a PC card. 552 • Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. 5 IMPORTANT NOTES Before Using PC Cards Handling the PC Cards 605a eiyakuchuu! • Never attempt to remove a PC card from the slot while accessing to the PC card (the indicator is lit); damage could result to the PC card. 608 • To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert only PC cards into the slot. Never insert any other type of PC card. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any other foreign objects inside the slot. 6 • Carefully insert the PC card all the way in—until it is firmly in place. PC Card Eject button Copyright 851 • Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part, of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law. 852a • When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument, this unit can perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS). This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production, and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works (such as your own compositions) that do not infringe on the copyrights of others. (SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and later copying through a digital connection. It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio equipment as a copyright-protection feature.) 853 • Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. Roland assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit. 6 About the Screen Shots in the Owner's Manual The screen shots printed in this owner’s manual are based on the factory settings. However, please be aware that in some cases they may differ from the actual factory settings. Contents USING THE UNIT SAFELY......................................................................3 IMPORTANT NOTES ...............................................................................5 Main Features........................................................................................11 Panel Descriptions................................................................................12 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 12 Rear Panel .................................................................................................................................................. 14 Installing an Option Board...................................................................................................................... 15 Installation de la carte facultative (French language for Canadian Safety Standard) .................... 16 Installation .............................................................................................17 Attaching the Rubber Feet....................................................................................................................... 17 Rack Mounting (Important Notes on Heat Radiation) ....................................................................... 17 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 .......................18 Together with Other Equipment (System Examples) ......................................................................... 18 Using the Control Input and Output Terminals....................................................................... 18 Using the MIDI Connectors......................................................................................................... 19 Using the RS-232C Connector ..................................................................................................... 20 Connections (Connection Methods) ...................................................................................................... 21 Dual Mono Mode .......................................................................................................................... 21 AR-LINK ........................................................................................................................................ 21 What You Can Do (Usage Tips) ............................................................................................................. 22 Repeat Playback of the Same Phrase.......................................................................................... 22 Playing a Variety of Phrases in Succession ............................................................................... 22 Basic Operations Turning the Power On and Off.............................................................23 Turning On the Power ............................................................................................................................. 23 Turning Off The Power............................................................................................................................ 23 Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP ................................................24 What Is EZ Setup? .................................................................................................................................... 24 Examples of EZ Setup Use ...................................................................................................................... 26 Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 ...................................................29 Types of Usable Cards ............................................................................................................................. 29 Card Storage Times and Number of Phrases ....................................................................................... 29 Formatting a Card .................................................................................................................................... 30 Important Notes on Handling Cards..................................................................................................... 32 Card Compatibility with Other Models in the AR Series................................................................... 33 If You’re Using a Legacy Model ................................................................................................. 33 Conversion to New Features on the AR-3000........................................................................... 34 The Display............................................................................................35 Viewing the Basic Screen......................................................................................................................... 35 Screen During Audio Phrase Playback ...................................................................................... 35 Screen During MIDI Phrase Playback........................................................................................ 35 Screen During Pattern Phrase or Song Phrase Playback......................................................... 35 Viewing the 7-segment Display .................................................................................................. 36 Display-related Settings........................................................................................................................... 37 Adjusting the Contrast ................................................................................................................. 37 Making the Display Go Dark ...................................................................................................... 38 7 Contents Recording Audio ...................................................................................40 Recording Units—Phrases ........................................................................................................... 40 Connecting Equipment ................................................................................................................ 40 Procedure for Recording ......................................................................................................................... 41 Enabling Recording Standby....................................................................................................... 41 Required Settings for Recording Audio Signals (Recording Settings) .................................. 42 Starting and Ending Recording................................................................................................... 49 Checking What You Recorded ............................................................................................................... 50 Information Recorded on the Card ............................................................................................ 50 Important Note: About Setting Information Imported from a Card..................................... 50 Playback Using the Panel on the Unit (Manual Playback) ................51 Applications Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings).............................54 Adding Information to Individual Phrases (Phrase Information) .................................................... 54 Three Useful Playback Modes for Phrase Settings................................................................... 54 Play Volume (%)............................................................................................................................ 54 Delay Time (00s 00f to 59s 29f) .................................................................................................... 55 Playback Point (Start and End) ................................................................................................... 56 Repeat Play (Repeat, Repeat Interval)....................................................................................... 57 Loop Play (Loop 1, Loop 2, Loop) .............................................................................................. 57 Fade (Fade In and Fade Out)....................................................................................................... 58 Control Out .................................................................................................................................... 59 Changing the Playback Tempo for MIDI Phrases (MIDI Playback Tempo) ........................ 60 Phrase Name .................................................................................................................................. 60 Creating Combinations of Phrases (Phrase Combination)................................................................. 61 Combinations of Phrase Units (Pattern Phrases)...................................................................... 61 Time-based Combinations (Song Phrases) ................................................................................ 64 Modifying Phrases Themselves (Phrase Edit)...................................................................................... 66 Deleting a Phrase (Phrase Delete)............................................................................................... 66 Deleting Audio Outside the Playback Points (Phrase Truncate) ........................................... 67 Copying a Phrase (Phrase Copy) ................................................................................................ 67 Deviding a Phrase (Phrase Divide) ............................................................................................ 68 Joining Phrases (Phrase Combine).............................................................................................. 69 Expanding or Compressing the Playback Time Without Changing the Pitch (Time Stretch) 71 Converting a Phrase’s Recording Settings (Phrase Convert) ................................................. 72 Phrase Information/Phrase Setting Correspondence Table .............................................................. 75 Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards ................................76 Making a Card Usable on the AR-3000 (Card Format) ........................................................... 76 Deleting All Phrases on a Card (Card Delete) .......................................................................... 76 Copying a Card (Card Copy) ...................................................................................................... 76 Copying Just the Settings (Setting Copy) .................................................................................. 77 Protecting a Card (Card Protect)................................................................................................. 77 Changing the Name of a Card (Card Name) ............................................................................ 78 Making Cards for Legacy Models Usable on the AR-3000 (Card Convert) ......................... 78 Card Conversion Chart/Conversion Error Chart .................................................................... 80 Recording and Playing MIDI Data (MIDI Phrases)..............................82 What Are MIDI Phrases? ............................................................................................................. 82 Connecting Equipment ................................................................................................................ 82 Unit Settings................................................................................................................................... 82 Starting and Ending Recording................................................................................................... 83 Playback of MIDI Phrases............................................................................................................ 84 8 Contents Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input Terminals)..............................................................................................85 What Is No-voltage/Make-contact? ........................................................................................... 85 Types of Control Input Playback ................................................................................................ 85 Type of Control Input Recording ............................................................................................... 86 Assigning a Phrase to a Port and Playing It Back (Direct Playback) ................................................ 86 What Is Direct Playback?/Uses and Applications ................................................................... 86 Connecting External Equipment................................................................................................. 86 Operational Specifications for Direct Playback ........................................................................ 86 AR-3000 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 87 Playing Back Phrases in the Order They Are Selected (Program Playback) ................................... 89 What is Program Playback?/Uses and Applications............................................................... 89 Connecting External Equipment................................................................................................. 90 Operational Specifications for Program Playback.................................................................... 90 Display Indications During Program Playback........................................................................ 91 AR-3000 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 91 Specifying Phrase Numbers in Binary Notation (Binary Playback) ................................................. 92 What is Binary Playback?/Uses and Applications .................................................................. 92 Connecting External Equipment................................................................................................. 93 Operational Specifications of Binary Playback......................................................................... 93 AR-3000 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 94 To Specify Phrases With Binary Signals .................................................................................... 95 Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table........................................................... 96 Controlling Recording with the Control Terminals (Terminal Recording) ..................................... 98 What is Terminal Recording/Uses and Applications ............................................................. 98 Connecting Equipment ................................................................................................................ 98 Operational Specifications for Terminal Recording................................................................. 98 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 100 To Specify Phrases With Binary Signals .................................................................................. 101 Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 (Control Output Terminal)..............................................................................................102 Starting Another Device (Busy Out).................................................................................................... 102 What Is a Busy Out Signal?/Equipment Connections .......................................................... 102 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 103 Controlling Another Device (Control Out)......................................................................................... 104 What Is a Control Out Signal?/Equipment Connections...................................................... 104 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 104 Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)...........105 What Is MIDI Control?/What You Can Do with MIDI Control .......................................... 105 Glossary of Selected MIDI Terms ............................................................................................. 105 Playback of Phrases Using MIDI Signals ............................................................................................ 105 Connecting External Equipment............................................................................................... 106 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 106 Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 1 (MMC) ......................................... 110 What Is MMC?/Remote Control from Another Device........................................................ 110 Connecting External Equipment............................................................................................... 110 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 111 Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 2 (MMC and MTC) ....................... 112 What Is MTC?/Synchronized Playback with Video Equipment and Other Devices ....... 112 Connecting External Equipment............................................................................................... 113 AR-3000 Settings (When the AR-3000 Is the Slave)................................................................ 114 Operation Procedures................................................................................................................. 116 AR-3000 Settings (When the AR-3000 Is the Master)............................................................. 116 9 Contents Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C Connector ..........................118 What’s the RS-232C Connector?/What You Can Do with the RS-232C Connector.......... 118 Connecting Equipment .............................................................................................................. 118 Baud Rate Setting ........................................................................................................................ 118 Available Documentation for the RS-232C.............................................................................. 118 Playing Two Units’s Worth of Data on the Left and Right (Dual Mono Mode) ...................................................................................................119 What Is the Dual Mono Mode?/Equipment Connections .................................................... 119 AR-3000 Settings ......................................................................................................................... 119 Operation Procedures................................................................................................................. 120 Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units (ARLINK) ....................................................................................................122 What Is AR-LINK?/What You Can Do Using AR-LINK...................................................... 122 Synchronized Audio Phrase Playback with AR-LINK Signals ....................................................... 122 Example of Connecting to an External Device ....................................................................... 122 Unit Settings................................................................................................................................. 123 Recording Procedure .................................................................................................................. 123 Playback Procedure .................................................................................................................... 123 Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback ............................124 Line Out (Thru) Setting During Phrase Playback.............................................................................. 124 Handy Uses of Line Thru........................................................................................................... 124 Line Thru Settings ....................................................................................................................... 124 Adjusting the Sound Quality During Audio Phrase Playback (Equalizer) ................................... 125 Keeping the Output Volume Unchanged (Input Volume Thru)..................................................... 126 Appendices Troubleshooting..................................................................................128 Error messages...................................................................................131 Cards................................................................................................... 133 Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart....................................................................................... 133 Settings When a Card Is Formatted ..................................................................................................... 134 Recorded Phrase Data............................................................................................................................ 135 Terminals .............................................................................................136 Specifications of the Control Input/Output Terminals .................................................................... 136 RS-232C Connector Specifications ....................................................................................................... 136 AR-LINK Connectors Specifications ................................................................................................... 137 MIDI Implementation...........................................................................138 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................................... 144 Specification........................................................................................146 Input/Output Standard......................................................................................................................... 148 Dimentions .............................................................................................................................................. 148 Index.................................................................................................... 149 10 Main Features High-quality Recording and Playback Thanks to Roland’s innovative RDAC system, you can enjoy high-quality, 24-bit recording and playback at 48 kHz using less data. You can select recording settings that suit the situation and the capacity of the card (sampling frequency: 6 levels, recording mode: 5 levels). This ensures support for recording and playback in a variety of situations and uses. What you record and the settings are all saved on the card, so you can change situations rapidly simply by changing cards. You can record and play back up to 2,000 phrases (when using two cards). Audio Recording System with No Moving Parts An audio recording system that uses PC cards and has no moving parts is employed. The system has no rotating parts or drive mechanism, so it’s practically maintenance free. This makes for outstanding durability with no loss of sound quality. Two-unit Playback with a Single Unit– Dual Mono Mode The Dual Mono mode lets you manipulate the left and right channels independently, and play back mono audio phrases individually. This means you can play back material for two units on a single AR-3000. You can also play back separate phrases on the left and right channels either simultaneously, or shifted. Built-in 2-band Equalizer The unit features an internal 2-band equalizer for audiophrase effects. This enables on-site correction of the sonic field. A Variety of Control Jacks for a Wide Range of Playback Methods Digital In Jack As connectors to use for control, the unit features a Control In jack, MIDI connectors, an RS-232C port, and AR-LINK connectors. This lets you select from a variety of playback methods and create systems matched to usage and situations. In addition to a Line In jack (analog) and Mic jack, the unit also features a Digital In jack. This means you can record audio phrases of even higher sound quality by connecting the unit to a digital-output device. MIDI Connectors Allow for Play of Musical Instruments and Syncing with Video Large screen, Easy-to-understand Messages, and EZ Setup Feature Assure Simple Settings and Operation Since the unit is equipped with MIDI connectors, you can record and play back MIDI signals. You can play an electronic musical instrument automatically, just like playing back an audio phrase. The large display and easy-to-understand messages make it simple to make settings. The unit also has a built-in EZ Setup feature that lets you make settings interactively. Control of recording/playback using MIDI signals is also supported. This means you can use MTC and MMC signals to obtain recording/playback that is synchronized to video and other external devices. You’ll appreciate the impressive power this provides when you’re using the AR-3000 for the first time, or when you need to change the settings in a hurry during play. Multi-track Operation–AR-LINK Feature A Full Array of Editing Features for Modifying Phrases the Way You Want You can use the AR-3000 like a sampler to edit and modify recorded material, including dividing, joining, and stretching the time. Nondestructive editing is possible, so you can modify the material without worrying about loss. The AR-LINK feature lets you link the unit to up to 32 other units to create a completely synchronized multi-track system. Conversion Feature for Using Data from Legacy Models Performing conversion with the Card Conversion feature makes it possible for the AR-3000 to utilize cards used with the earlier AR-2000/100/1 models, or to use cards created with the AR-3000 on earlier models. This bidirectional data exchange lets you make effective use of materials and data. 11 Panel Descriptions Front Panel fig.2-01e 9 5 1 2 3 7 4 6 8 10 12 13 14 16 15 11 17 1. Mic In Jack 5. Card Eject Buttons This is for connecting a microphone during audio recording. 6. Display → “Recording Audio” (p. 40) →“Viewing the Basic Screen” (p. 35) 2. INPUT VOLUME Knobs 7. PLAY Button and PLAY Indicator The outer control adjusts the volume level of the signal input to the Line In jack. The inner control adjusts the microphone-input volume level. fig.2-02e MIC Volume (inner ring) LINE Volume (outer ring) →“Recording Audio” (p. 40) The volume level of signals input to the Digital In jack cannot be changed. 3. Card Access Indicator This lights up when the unit reads or writes to a card. When the PC card drive is in operation (that is, when the access indicator is illuminated), do not try to take out the card or turn off the power. Doing so may damage the card. 4. Card Slots Do not insert any object other than a PC card (such as a wire, coin, or different type of card) into the card slots. Doing so may damage the unit. 12 • Pressing the PLAY button plays back a phrase. When playback is paused, pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button restarts playback. • Holding down the STOP button and pressing the PLAY button puts the unit in recording standby. Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button while in this state starts recording. 8. PAUSE/BACK Button and PAUSE Indicator • Pressing the PAUSE button during playback of an audio phrase pauses playback. Playback resumes when the PLAY or PAUSE button is pressed again. • Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button while in the recording-standby state starts recording. • When you are making settings, this button is used to make the insertion point (highlighted) go back one step. Panel Descriptions 12. ENTER Button fig.2-03e ●About When the Indicators Light/Flash When Playing Back/Recording State PLAY button indicator PAUSE button indicator 13. SELECT Dial (Doubles As SELECT Button) This is used for such operations as selecting phrases and choosing setting items. During Playback Lights in green Extinguished 14. OUTPUT VOLUME Knob During Pause (Playback) Flashes in green Flashes in green This adjusts the volume level of the final output (at the audio output jacks). During Recording Flashes in red Standby Flashes in red During Recording Lights in red Extinguished →"Recording Audio" (p. 40) →"Playback Using the Panel on the Unit (Manual Playback)" (p. 51) During Pause (Playback) PLAY button indicator Lights in green During Recording Lights in red Standby → “Keeping the Output Volume Unchanged (Input Volume Thru)” (p. 126) 15. Headphones Jack When Sync Source is set to MTC State To prevent incorrect operation, you can disable this control and set the volume at a fixed level. PAUSE button indicator This is for connecting headphones for monitoring recording and playback. Lights in orange Lights in orange →"Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)" (p. 105) 9. STOP Button • Pressing the STOP button stops phrase playback or recording, extinguishing the PLAY indicator. • Holding down the STOP button and pressing the PLAY button puts the unit in recording standby. The headphones volume level is adjusted with the OUTPUT VOLUME control (the same as for the final volume [the audio output jacks]). When you activate the Volume Thru feature, you can use the OUTPUT VOLUME control to adjust the headphones volume even when the OUTPUT VOLUME control has been deactivated. 16. POWER Switch Turn the AR-3000’s power on and off. 10. EZ SETUP Button and EZ SETUP Indicator 17. Card Cap (Included Item) This activates the EZ Setup feature, which lets you make settings interactively. This is a card-shaped cap designed to keep foreign objects from getting inside the unit. Insert this cap when cards are not in use. Use this feature if you’re using the AR-3000 for the first time, or when you need to change the settings in a hurry during play. The indicator lights up when EZ Setup is active. → “Easy Setup and Operation!–EZ Setup” (p. 24) 11. MODE Button and MODE Indicator For entering the mode for making settings. The indicator lights up while settings are made. 13 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel fig.2-04e 1 2 4 3 11 5 9 10 6 7 8 Top Panel 1. AC Inlet This is for connecting the included AC power cord. Connect it securely so that it doesn’t come loose. 4. DIGITAL IN Jack (Coaxial, S/P DIF, EIAJ CP1201-compliant) (Refer to p. 147 – for power requirements) This is used when recording audio from a device equipped with a digital audio-output jack. 2. AR-LINK Connectors (OUT and IN) 5. RS-232C Connector These are for connecting the AR units to each other when you’re using more than one AR unit at the same time. This is used when connecting the AR-3000 to a computer or the like for exchanging signals. → “Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units (AR-LINK)” (p. 122) →“Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C Connector” (p. 118) 3. MIDI Connectors (OUT/THRU and IN) 6. Control Input/Output Terminals These are used to make the connections when you operate the AR with MIDI signals for recording MIDI phrases, performing MIDI control, and so on. These are used for connecting to external control devices. • MIDI IN: This receives MIDI information from another MIDI instrument. • Controlling the AR-3000 with Signals from an External Control Device →“Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input Terminals)” (p. 85) • MIDI OUT: This sends MIDI information from the AR3000. • Controlling an External Device with Signals from the AR-3000 • MIDI THRU: This sends, unchanged, MIDI information received by MIDI IN. → “Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000(Control Output Terminals)” (p. 102) On the AR-3000, a single connector doubles in use for MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU. When shipped from the factory, the connector is set to “OUT.” You can change the function of the connector as required. → “Recording and Playing MIDI Data” (p. 82) →“Controlling the AR with MIDI Signals (MIDI control)” (p. 105) 14 7. LINE IN Jack This is used when recording audio from a device equipped with an analog audio-output jack. Panel Descriptions 8. Audio Output Jacks (BALANCED OUTPUT) Installing an Option Board These are the final audio output jacks. They are used for connection to a power amp or the like. Both balanced and unbalanced connections are possible. The connector pin assignments are as shown below. Before making connections, be sure to check the pin assignments of the other equipment first. fig.2-05e GND(SLEEVE) HOT(TIP) When installing, be sure refer to the owner’s manual for the respective option board. fig.2-06e Top Panel Removed screws GND(SLEEVE) HOT(TIP) COLD(RING) Balanced Output Unbalanced Output 9. Option Board Slot This is the recess for installing an option board. Option board → “Installing an Option board” Rear Panel When installing, be sure to refer to the owner’s manual for the option board. 10. Option Board Space This is where an option board is installed. → “Installing an Option board” Important Notes on Installation When installing, be sure to refer to the owner’s manual for the respective option board. ● Before installing the board, switch off the power to the equipment and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. 11. Rubber Feet (Included Items) ● Remove only the specified screws. → “Attaching the Rubber Feet (Included Items)” (p. 17) ● Be careful not to let removed screws fall into the unit. ● After you have removed the panel, cover, and screws, do not leave them off. When you have finished installing the option board, be sure to reattach the panel, cover, and screws. ● Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing the board. ● After installation, if the unit fails to power up when you switch on the power, contact your Roland Service Station. ● To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity, please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board. • Before you handle the circuit board, first touch the front panel of the AR-3000, and while maintaining contact with the front panel, pick up the circuit board. This discharges any static electricity that has accumulated in your body and clothing. • When handling the board, grasp it only by the panel or the board’s edges. Avoid touching any of the electronic 15 Panel Descriptions components or connectors. • Before you connect any cables, make sure they do not carry a static electricity charge. Such charges can be transmitted, for example, if the other end of the cable has been in contact with a carpet (or other object) where there is a static electricity buildup. • Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped, and put the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it. ● Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals. ● Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board. If it doesn’t fit properly on the first attempt, remove the board and try again. ● When circuit board installation is complete, double-check your work. ● Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board (model no. AR-NT1). ● Install only the specified circuit board(s) (model no. ARNT1). Remove only the specified screws. Remarques importantes sur l’installation ● Avant d’installer la carte, éteignez l’équipement et débranchez le cordon d’alimentation de la prise. ● Retirez uniquement les vis indiquées. ● Faites attention de ne pas laisser les vis tomber dans l’unité. ● Après avoir retiré le panneau, le couvercle et les vis, ne les laissez pas ainsi. Une fois terminée l’installation de la carte facultative, assurez-vous de remettre le panneau, le couvercle et les vis en place. ● Faites attention de ne pas vous couper sur l’ouverture d’installation de la carte. ● Après l’installation, si l’unité ne se remet pas en marche lorsque vous la rallumez, communiquez avec le centre de service Roland. ● Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand vous manipulez la carte afin d’eviter tout risque d’endommagement des pieces internes par l’electricite statique. • Avant de manipuler la carte de circuit imprimé, touchez l’espace près de l’ouverture de montage située sur le panneau avant de l’unité pour éliminer l’électricité statique accumulée dans votre corps et vos vêtements. Installation de la carte facultative (French language for Canadian Safety Standard) Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la procédure d’installation, reportez-vous à la documentation spécifique à la carte facultative. fig.install_F Top Panel Vis retirées • Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les cotes. Evitez de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs. • Avant de connecter tout cable, assurez-vous qu’il ne contient aucune charge d’electricite statique. De telles charges peuvent etre transmises, par exemple, si l’autre extremite du cable touche a un tapis (ou autre objet) ou il y a accumulation d’electricite statique. • Conservez le sachet d’origine dans lequel etait la carte lors de l’envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou la transporter. ● Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprimes ou aux connecteurs. ● Ne jamais forcer lors de l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimes. Si la carte s’ajuste mal au premier essai, enlevez la carte et recommencez l’installation. Option board Rear Panel ● Quand l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimes est terminee, reverifiez si tout est bien installe. ● Toujours eteindre et debrancher l’appareil avant de commencer l’installation de la carte. (modele no ARNT1). ● N’installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes specifiees (modele no AR-NT1). Enlevez seulement les vis indiquees. 16 Installation Attaching the Rubber Feet Attach these as required, such as when you’re using the AR-3000 without mounting it on a rack or the like. Peel off the double-sided tape from the rubber feet and affix the rubber feet at the locations shown in the following figure. fig.4-01e Bottom chassis Rack Mounting (Important Notes on Heat Radiation) When you are mounting the unit on a rack or the like, give attention to the following points to ensure efficient cooling. • Install in a well-ventilated location. • Avoid mounting in a sealed rack. Warm air within the rack cannot escape and is sucked into the unit again, making efficient cooling impossible. • When you are using a stacked mounting arrangement, be especially sure to provide for adequate ventilation within the rack to keep discharged air from being sucked back into the unit. If the back surface of the rack cannot be kept open, then provide a ventilation port or ventilation fan at the upper area of the back surface of the rack, where warm air accumulates. • When you are using the unit in a portable case or rack, remove the covers from the front and back surfaces of the case, so that the front and back surfaces of the unit are not obstructed. • If an error message informing you of a dangerous rise in temperature appears (p. 131), then heat-dissipating measures are needed. Refer to the cautions just described and check the installed state of the unit and the rack. * When placing the unit on the rack, be careful not to pinch your fingers. * For more information about installation, also see “Placement” in the Important Notes (p. 5). 17 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 You can use the AR-3000 alone or in combination with other AR-3000 units or other equipment to play audio in a wide variety of scenes. This section shows some examples of these. You can use these examples as a starting point for making changes to match your own usage circumstances. Together with Other Equipment (System Examples) Using the Control Input and Output Terminals ● Control Input: Messages, explanations, warnings, announcements, effect sounds, and the like are played with high sound quality according to control signals from sensors, buttons, and switches. Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input Terminals) → p. 85 fig.5-01e Sensor Program Timer Momentary Switch pm. Pressing the switch plays back a set announcement, guidance message, explanation, or the like •Set announcements played back as required •Broadcast of museum exhibition explanations or guidance Sensor-triggered automatic broadcasts Control timer for automatic broadcasts •Guidance announcements made upon detection of a person's presence •Playback of event performances at attractions and other sites •Playback of message broadcasts and announcements at regular, set times in offices, factories, or other such areas •Broadcasts at set times of upcoming events at amusements areas Types of External Control Power Amp Control Signal Audio Signal Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 (Control Output Terminals) → p. 102 ● Control Output: Control signals can be output during or after phrase playback to control an external device. fig.5-02e Busy Out Control Signal Audio Signal Power Amp Only during phrase playback, power amp or other gear is powered up (offset time set to five seconds) Lamp lights during phrase playback Power Unit Power Reray Switch Control Out After playback ends, controls external device * A card formatted on the AR-2000 or AR-3000 is required. Power Amp •Extinguishing lights •When elevator doors are closed and other similar situations 18 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 Using the MIDI Connectors Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) → p. 105 ● Spatial Expression With the AR-3000 serving as the master, the MIDI signals it sends out can be used to get a sound module to play background music. Or, you can have sound-effect phrases be played by a slaved AR-3000. This lets you create sonic fields with six-channel multi-playback. fig.5-03e (for MIDI Sequencer) MIDI patch bay MIDI signal Audio signal Sound Module Power Amp. Power Amp. Power Amp. ● Sound-field Control Using batch MIDI control from a switch box, you can change programs on a mixer, equalizer, or the like to control the sonic field. fig.5-04e Switch box (for MIDI Sequencer) Digital Mixer & Console Control signal MIDI signal Audio signal MIDI patch bay Equalizer Power Amp. Equalizer Power Amp. 19 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 Using the RS-232C Connector By connecting an RS-232C cable, you can control the AR-3000 from an external control device, such as a computer or touch panel. fig.5-05e Control signal Audio signal ●AR Control with a computer Power Amp. ●Explanatory messages and guidance for public facilities and museum exhibits CONTROL PANEL Control Interface Power Amp. 20 Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C Connector → p. 118 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 Connections (Connection Methods) Dual Mono Mode The Dual Mono mode is a feature for playing different mono audio phrases independently on the left and right channels. This lets you use the unit to play two units’s worth of data. You can also play back separate phrases on the left and right channels simultaneously, or control them individually. Playing Two Unit’s Worth of Data on the Left and Right (Dual Mono Mode) → p. 119 fig.5-06e Power Amp. E x h ib it A E x h ib it B Control signal Audio signal AR-LINK ● Connecting with the AR-LINK Cable You can operate four AR-3000 units completely in sync as an eight-channel multi-player. fig.5-07e Power Amp. Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units (AR-LINK) → p. 122 Control input Control signal Audio signal 21 Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000 What You Can Do (Usage Tips) Repeat Playback of the Same Phrase There are several methods for doing this. Choose a playback method that matches your usage conditions. Setting the Phrase Information for Repeat Play You can repeat each individual phrase. Repeat Play → p. 57 You can also do repeat play for a phrase combination (a group of phrases). Phrase Combinations → p. 61 Inputting a Continuous Make-contact Signal to the Control Input Terminals You can repeat playback by continuously shorting the control input terminals. * With some settings, playback doesn’t repeat even when you continuously input a make-contact signal. For information, refer to “Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input Terminals)” (p. 85). Playing a Variety of Phrases in Succession There are several methods for doing this. Choose a playback method that matches your usage conditions. Using Phrase Combinations This continuously plays back stored phrases in succession. Phrase Combinations → p. 61 Using Direct Playback of Control Input By inputting control signals to a port number from 1 through 16, you can play back the phrase assigned to the number. Direct Playback → p. 86 Using Program Playback of Control Input This successively plays back phrases in preset sequence each time a control signal is input to the START port. Program Playback → p. 89 Using Binary Playback of Control Input You can select phrases by inputting binary signals to port numbers 1 through 10, and play the selected phrases in succession each time you input control signals to the START port. 22 Binary Playback→ p. 92 Turning the Power On and Off Turning On the Power Once the connections have been completed (p. 40), turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices. Power on your equipment as described in the following. After the devices are powered on, set the volumes to each connected devices equipment. Connected devices → AR-3000 → Power Amplifier etc. 2 3 Confirm the volume levels on the AR-3000 and any amp or mixer that is connected turned down to the lowest settings. Press the POWER switch to turn on the power. To avoid risk of electric shock, do not touch the connectors while the unit is in operation. Watch the display. * This display is only an example for illustrative purposes, The content of the display will differ depending on the card settings. Turning Off The Power 1 2 Confirm the volume levels on the AR-3000 and any amp or mixer that is connected turned down to the lowest settings. Switch off the power of the device in the reverse order of that used to switch on the power. The display will go dark, indicating that the power has been turned off. 23 Basic Operations 1 This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally. Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP What Is EZ Setup? On the AR-3000, settings are normally made by using the MODE button to enter the setting mode, then selecting the needed items from the various menu levels. EZ Setup is an interactive method for making settings, whereby you first select the target and the feature you want to use, then make the necessary settings, one after another. Use this feature if you’re using the AR-3000 for the first time, if you don’t know what items need to be set, or when you need to change the settings in a hurry during play. What You Can Do with EZ Setup With EZ Setup, you can make target-specific and function-specific settings like the ones shown below. A. Creating Cards 1. Creating a New Card (p. 30) 2. Copying a Card (p. 76) 3. Using AR-2000 Cards (p. 78) B. Recording Phrases 1. Audio Recording (Line) (p. 40) 2. Audio Recording (Line/Mic) (p. 40) 3. Audio Recording (Digital Connectors) (p. 40) 4. MIDI Recording (p. 82) C. Phrase Editing 1. Phrase Information Settings (p. 54) • Playback Volume Setting • Loop Play • Repeat Play 2. Phrase Combination (p. 61) • Creating Pattern Phrases • Creating Song Phrases 3. Modifying Phrases (p. 66) • Deleting Phrases • Splitting Phrases 24 Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP • Joining Phrases • Expanding and Compressing Playback Times (Time Stretch) • Copying Phrases D. Control from an External Device 1. Playback Using the Screw-on Connectors (p. 85) • Selected Playback of Stored Phrases • Sequential Playback of Stored Phrases Basic Operations • Playback of Specified Phrase Numbers • Recording Specified Phrase Numbers 2. Playback Using MIDI Signals (p. 105) 3. Control Using RS-232C (p. 118) E. Playing Two Units' Worth of Data Independently on the Left and Right (p. 119) F. Synchronizing Multiple Devices 1. Synchronization Using AR-LINK (p. 122) 2. Synchronization Using MIDI (p. 110) G. LCD Settings 1. Adjusting LCD Contrast (p. 37) 2. LCD Auto Power-off (p. 38) H. Control Output Signal Settings 1. Signal Settings for Starting Other Equipment (p. 102) 2. Signal Settings for Controlling Other Equipment (p. 104) I. Line Output Settings 1. Line Thru Settings During Playback (p. 124) 2. Adjusting the Sound Quality of Audio Phrases (p. 125) 3. Locking Output Volume (p. 126) 25 Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP Examples of EZ Setup Use This section describes “recording audio” as an example of operations using EZ Setup. Recording Audio Refer to “Connecting Equipment” (p. 40) and connect the external equipment. 1 Press the EZ SETUP button. The EZ SETUP indicator lights up. 2 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the “Phrase Recording” icon, then press the dial. fig.EZ-01 Present icon location Number of icons on the menu The present screen content and messages are scrolled at the bottom of the screen. 3 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the “Phrase Recording (Line)” icon, then press the dial. fig.EZ-02 4 Turn the SELECT dial to choose “Card to Record (A/B),” then press the dial. fig.EZ-03 26 In each step, each press of the PAUSE (BACK) button lets you go back one screen. Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP 5 6 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to record, then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording type (Stereo or Mono), then press the dial. fig.EZ-04 Basic Operations 7 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the RDAC grade (Highquality, Normal, or Extended-time). fig.EZ-05 When you press the SELECT dial, a screen like the one below appears. fig.EZ-06 8 Turn the SELECT dial to choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button to enter recording standby. fig.EZ-07 9 Use the INPUT VOLUME control to adjust the recording level, then press the ENTER button to start recording. fig.EZ-08 10 Press the STOP button to stop recording. fig.EZ-09 27 Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP 11 Turn the SELECT dial to choose “Finish,” then press the dial to return to the initial EZ Setup screen. * Selecting “Confirmation of recorded data” and pressing the ENTER button plays back what you recorded. * Pressing “Re-recording” returns you to step 4 so you can record again. 12 28 Press the EZ SETUP button to return to the normal screen. In the provided EZ Setup menus, depending on the selected item, the settings may be made using the normal setting screens. However, when you finish making all necessary settings, you are returned to the initial EZ Setup screen. Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 Types of Usable Cards The AR-3000 stores recorded audio and MIDI signals on the card. Also, all information other than recorded audio (phrase information) is stored on the card as well. (That is, it is not stored in the AR unit itself.) This means that you can change the settings simply by swapping cards. Cards that are assured of working on the AR-3000 are Roland PC Cards (PM Series), sold separately. • PM-004 (4 MB) • PM-008 (8 MB) • PM-016 (16 MB) • PM-024 (24 MB) • PM-040 (40 MB) • PM-080 (80 MB) • PM-184 (184 MB) and • SmartMedia Adapter (SMA-1, sold separately) Depending on the type of PC card or SmartMedia you are using, it may not be possible to perform recording or playback at the set RDAC-Grade and RDAC-Mode due to data write speed and other factors. → This is an adapter that lets you use commercially available SmartMedia cards on the AR-3000. * SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Card Storage Times and Number of Phrases To purchase Roland PC Cards (PM Series), contact the authorized dealer where you purchased the unit, or your local Roland Service Center. You can create up to 1,000 phrases on a single card. When you format a card, you preselect 250, 500, or 1,000 as the maximum number of phrases to record on the card. * The possible recording time of a card varies according to card capacity and recording settings. * After formatting, you cannot change the maximum number of phrases. Please be aware that changing the maximum number of phrases requires reformatting, which erases everything stored on the card. * When you are using Card Conversion to convert a created card to AR-2000 format, select either 250 or 500 as the setting for the maximum number of phrases. Depending on the length of stored phrases, it may not be possible to create the set maximum number of phrases. For information about maximum recording times under various settings, refer to the “Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart” in Appendices (p. 133). 29 Basic Operations Roland PC Cards (PM Series) Information cannot be stored in memory in the AR unit itself, so be sure to purchase cards separately. There are several types of card capacities available. The amount of information that you can store differs according to card capacity. Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 Formatting a Card Before you can use a new card, or a card that was formerly used on another device, you must first format (initialize) the card. Once the formatting is complete, you can give the card a name (using up to eight characters). When you record a phrase, this card name is automatically added to the beginning of the phrase name. Example: Card name: MESSAGE → Phrase name: MESSAGE 1 The time required for formatting also depends on the card type (capacity), and may take from several seconds to more than a minute. * If you don’t give the card a name, the name “AR-3000” is used. Important Note About Formatting • Formatting erases all data on the card. Before you format a card, make certain it does not contain any important data. In order to demonstrate the full performance of the AR3000, we recommend formatting for a maximum number of 1,000 phrases. • You can create up to 1,000 phrases on a single card. When you format a card, you preselect 250, 500, or 1,000 as the maximum number of phrases to record on the card. * The possible recording time of a card varies according to card capacity and recording settings. * After formatting, you cannot change the maximum number of phrases. Please be aware that changing the maximum number of phrases requires reformatting, which erases everything stored on the card. * When you are using Card Conversion to convert a created card to AR-2000 format, select either 250 or 500 as the setting for the maximum number of phrases. Procedure for Formatting a Card 1 2 3 4 30 Make sure no PC cards are inserted into card slots A and B, then switch on the power. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.1 Card Format,” then press the dial. Insert the card you want to format into card slot A or B. Depending on the length of stored phrases, it may not be possible to create the set maximum number of phrases. For information about maximum recording times under various settings, refer to the “Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart” in Appendices (p. 133). For information about the initial values of various settings when formatted, refer to "Settings When a Card Is Formatted" (p. 134). Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 5 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card you want to format (A or B), then press the dial. fig.07-g01e 6 When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. 8 Basic Operations 7 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the maximum number of phrases that can be recorded on the card (250, 500, or 1,000), then press the dial. Never attempt to remove the card while formatting is in progress. When formatting ends, enter the card name. Turn the SELECT dial to choose a character. Press the dial to confirm the selected character. fig.07-g02e • Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet (upper case) space numerals - ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { } • FWD: This advances the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial advances the entry location by one. • BACK: This moves back the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial moves back the entry location by one. • INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a single space. • DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a single character. • END: This quits the settings process. 31 Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 9 To quit saving, in step 8, turn the SELECT dial to choose “END,” then press the dial. fig.07-g03e 10 When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. • When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 11 Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Important Notes on Handling Cards ●When Inserting Securely insert the card as far as it will go into the card slot. ●When Removing To remove a card, press the eject button. Never attempt to remove a card while the card access indicator is illuminated. Also, do not switch off the power or unplug the power cord while the card access indicator is illuminated. Doing so may damage the card. 32 Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 Card Compatibility with Other Models in the AR Series If You’re Using a Legacy Model If you take a card used on a legacy model (AR-2000/1000/1) and use it on the AR-3000, or if you use an AR-3000 card on a legacy model, the following operational limitations will apply. Basic Operations ● Using Cards in AR-2000 Format (from Models AR-2000/1000/1) on the AR-3000 You can playback cards just as they are, but you cannot change settings, or edit or record phrases. fig.7-01e (Card Compatibility for Playback—2000 \> 3000) O Playback ✕ Change settings, or Edit or Record phrases Card in AR-2000 Format However, using the Card Conversion feature to convert to AR-3000 format makes it possible to change settings and to edit and record phrases. fig.7-02e (Card Compatibility for Editing—2000 \> 3000) O Playback O Change settings, or Edit or Record phrases Card Conversion Card in AR-2000 Format Card Convert → p. 78 ● Using Cards in AR-3000 Format on a Legacy Model (AR-2000/1000/1) Such cards cannot be used as is. fig.7-03e (Card Compatibility for Playback—3000 \> 2000) Legacy Model ✕ Cannot be used Card in AR-3000 Format 33 Cards Compatible with the AR-3000 However, using the Card Conversion feature to convert to AR-2000 format makes it possible to perform playback, change settings, and edit and record phrases. * Please be aware that a card in AR-3000 format for which the maximum number of phrases is set at 1,000 cannot be converted to AR-2000 format. fig.7-04e (Card Compatibility for Editing—3000 \> 2000) Legacy Model O Playback O Change settings, or Edit or Record phrases Card Conversion Card in AR-3000 Format Conversion to New Features on the AR-3000 When you convert a card in AR-3000 format to a card in AR-2000 format, the AR-3000 setting items are converted as shown in the “Card Conversion Chart” (p. 80). On legacy models such as the AR-2000, items set on the AR-3000 are grouped into the following four types. • Effective without change • Converted to similar values • Not valid • Result in an error and halt conversion The settings for items that are invalid or converted to similar values are lost, and are not recovered by re-converting to AR-3000 format. Also, for items which result in an error and cause conversion to stop, it is necessary to perform phrase conversion, phrase truncation, deletion (after making a backup), or other measures to eliminate the cause of the error. (For information on error-causing items and remedies, refer to “Conversion Error Chart” (p. 81).) When you’re using the AR-3000 to record or edit cards that will be used on the AR-2000, we recommend making settings only for items that will remain effective without change when the card is converted to AR-2000 format. 34 Card Convert → p. 78 The Display Viewing the Basic Screen Screen During Audio Phrase Playback During normal audio phrase playback, the display shows the following information. Stereo phrase Icon indicating a stereo phrase Phrase Name Phrase Number RDAC-Grade RDAC-Mode Remaining Time/Elapsed Time (When stopped, the playback time for the phrase is displayed.) Mono phrase fig.08-g01ae Icon indicating a mono phrase Phrase Name Phrase Number RDAC-Grade RDAC-Mode Remaining Time/Elapsed Time (When stopped, the playback time for the phrase is displayed.) Screen During MIDI Phrase Playback During MIDI phrase playback, the display shows the following information. fig.08-g02e Icon indicating a MIDI phrase MIDI Phrases → p. 82 Phrase name Phrase Number Number of the measure now being played back RDAC-Mode Screen During Pattern Phrase or Song Phrase Playback During pattern phrase or song phrase playback, the display shows the following information. Pattern Phrases and Song Phrases → p. 61, p. 64 Pattern phrase fig.08-g03e Icon indicating a Pattern phrase Pattern phrase Name Remaining Time/Elapsed Time Pattern phrase Mode Standby Number of the phrase now being played back Pattern phrase Number Playback Song phrase fig.08-g03ae Icon indicating a Song phrase Song phrase Name Song phrase Number Remaining Time/Elapsed Time Number of the phrase now being played back 35 Basic Operations You can the Elapsed Time/ Remaining Time display by pressing the ENTER button during playback or while playback is paused. fig.08-g01e The Display Viewing the 7-segment Display The 7-segment portion in the upper area of the display shows the following information. fig.8-01e DELAY REPEAT VOL LOOP CONT OUT ● DELAY (Delay Time) When the “Delay Time” setting for a phrase during playback has been made, this shows the progress. Delay Time → p. 55 • This shows the time until playback starts (S: second, F: frame). • When no delay has been set, “0000” is displayed. ● REPEAT When the “Repeat Play” setting for a phrase during playback has been made, this shows the progress. Repeat Play → p. 57 • This shows the setting for the number of repetitions. • When the setting for the repeat interval has been made, this shows the time from when phrase playback ends until playback of the next phrase starts (M: minute, S: second). • When Repeat Play is set to “On (Endless),” then “on” is displayed. • When Repeat Play is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed. ● CONT OUT (Control Out) When the “Control Out” setting for a phrase during playback has been made, this shows the progress. Control Out → p. 59 • This shows the offset time set for Control Out (the time after phrase playback until output—M: minute, S: second). • When Control Out is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed. ● VOL (Volume) This displays the playback volume setting for audio phrases. Play Volume → p. 54 • For MIDI phrases, “---” is displayed. ● LOOP When the “Loop Play” setting for a phrase during playback has been made, this shows the progress. • This shows the setting for the number of loops. • When the number of loops is set to “On (Endless),” then “on” is displayed. • When the number of loops is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed. • For pattern phrases, song phrases, and MIDI phrases, “---” is displayed. 36 Loop Play → p. 57 The Display Display-related Settings Adjusting the Contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display. Adjust it to match your usage conditions. Procedure for Adjusting the Display Contrast 1 Basic Operations Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2 3 Use the SELECT dial to choose “10.1 Contrast,” then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to set Contrast (-10 to +10), then press the dial. fig.08-g04e 4 When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5 Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. 37 The Display Making the Display Go Dark You can make the display go dark automatically after a certain period of time has elapsed following the last operation in the phrase playback screen. You can set the time until the display goes dark (Sleep Time) to anything from 30 seconds to 59 minutes 59 seconds. When the unit is in continuous use for long periods, such as on systems that run 24 hours a day, this can help protect the display from deterioration. Set it to match your usage conditions. When the display is dark, the EZ SETUP indicator flashes. When the display is dark, you can make it appear again quickly by pressing any of the six buttons on the front panel. Procedure for Making the Display Go Dark 1 Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2 3 4 Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.6 Display Sleep,” then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Display Sleep (ON), then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Sleep Time (00m 30sec to 59m 59sec), then press the dial. fig.08-g05e * You can make the setting for Sleep Time only when “ON” has been selected for Display Sleep. 5 When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 38 The Display 6 Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. Basic Operations Making the Display Appear Again fig.8-02e When the display is dark, you can make it appear again quickly by pressing any of the six buttons. 39 Recording Audio Recording Units—Phrases A single item of data recorded from the point where you start recording until the point where you stop recording is called a phrase. Audio data and MIDI data are both handled as phrases. Phrases are managed by phrase numbers. MIDI Phrases → p. 82 fig.09-g01e Phrase Name Phrase Number Connecting Equipment The AR-3000 has a Mic jack on the front and an Analog Line In jack(LINE IN) and a Digital In jack(DIGITAL IN) on the back. Make the connections as appropriate for the equipment being used for recording. You can also use the Mic jack and the Line In jack (analog only) at the same time. When you do this, it’s possible to mix the Mic and Line In (analog) input. You cannot use the Mic and Digital In jacks at the same time. fig.09-01e (Connections for Recording) Powered Speaker For monitor Headphone Microphone Formatted Card IN (ANALOG) IN (DIGITAL) OUT (DIGITAL) OUT (ANALOG) Sound Recording Device * Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by: 1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s). 2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers. 3. Lowering volume levels. 40 To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections. Recording Audio Monitor Output During Recording and Recording Standby Audio input from the Mic jack and the Digital In jack is output from the Balanced Output jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port only during recording or recording standby, and you can monitor the recording state. Audio input from the Line In jacks can be output from the Balanced Output jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port during recording or recording standby, or even during ordinary playback. * Audio input from the Mic jack and the Digital In jack cannot be output to the Balanced Output jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port during playback. Basic Operations The quality of sounds output from the audio output jack differs from that of RDAC-Grade or RDAC-Mode sound quality. Be sure to play back the phrase after recording to confirm the quality of the content. Line Thru Settings → p. 124 Procedure for Recording Important! Cards in AR-2000 format cannot be used. If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), the operation will halt with an error message. Thereafter, the operation cannot be resumed until all cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Enabling Recording Standby Make the correct connections, then turn on the power switch. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Recording Standby 1 2 Insert a formatted card(p. 30) into one of the slots. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number you want to record. To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial. * You cannot change the phrase number after recording, so be sure to select the phrase number you want to record. 41 Recording Audio 3 Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button to go into recording standby. During recording standby, the PLAY indicator and the PAUSE indicator flash in red. fig.09-g02e If you try to re-record a phrase that’s already been recorded, a prompt message appears. If you choose “YES” and press the Enter button, the recorded data for the phrase is deleted and the unit goes into recording standby. If you choose “NO,” the unit returns to the normal display. * Please be aware that data deleted here cannot be recovered, even if you cancel recording standby without recording anything. * When Card Protect (p. 77) is set to “ON,” recorded phrases are protected and recording is not possible (writing, overwriting, deleting, and editing card data is prohibited). When you have created a new phrase by rerecording, the following phrase information remains in effect and is not deleted. 1.1 Playback Volume (except MIDI Phrase) 1.2 Delay Time 1.4 Repeat Play 1.6 Fade (except MIDI Phrase) 1.7 Control Out 1.8 MIDI Tempo (only tMIDI Phrase) 1.9 Phrase Name Required Settings for Recording Audio Signals (Recording Settings) In order perform recording matched to usage conditions, including the connected equipment, recording source, sound quality, time, and playback system, you make recording settings. • Recording settings are made in phrase units. You can mix phrases having different recording settings on a single card. • The possible recording time of a card varies according to the recording settings. For a rough guide to maximum recording times with various settings, see the “Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart” in Appendices (p. 133). * When you don’t change the recording settings, the recording settings for the most recent recording made on the specified card are used. * If you don’t need to change the recording settings in effect when the card was formatted, you can proceed to “Adjusting the Recording Level” (p. 49). Recording Settings in Effect When a Card Is Formatted 42 • Selected recording connector: LINE-IN • RDAC-Grade: STANDARD • RDAC-Mode: MODE3 • Recording type: STEREO • Trigger recording setting: OFF Settings When a Card Is Formatted → p. 134 Recording Audio What’s RDAC? RDAC (Roland Digital Audio Coding) is a proprietary audio recording standard from Roland. It achieves high sound quality and also makes it possible to record for long times. Set the input connector to record from. Make the selection to match the connected device. • LINE-IN: LINE IN jacks • LINE+MIC-IN: LINE IN jacks and Mic jack • DIGITAL-IN: DIGITAL IN jack • MIDI-IN: MIDI connector (In) The "DIGITAL-IN" setting cannot be used when no device is connected to the DIGITAL IN jack Procedure for Selecting the Recording Connector 1 Put the unit into recording standby. 2 Turn the SELECT dial to choose “REC-In,” then press the dial. 3 Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location (highlighted). fig.09-g03e 4 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the REC-In (for audio recording, this is LINE-IN, LINE+MIC-IN or DIGITAL-IN), then press the ENTER button. fig.09-g04e * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. • Next, if you’re making the setting for “RDAC-Grade” (p. 44), you can proceed to step 2 of the procedure for setting the RDAC-Grade. 43 Basic Operations Selecting the Recording Connector (LINE-IN/LINE+MIC-IN/ DIGITAL-IN/MIDI-IN) Recording Audio RDAC-Grade (Sampling Frequency) The RDAC-Grade is the type of sampling frequency for digital recording. On the AR-3000, you can select from among six grades. fig.09-02e (RDAC Grade) S-HIGH : 48 kHz HIGH : 44.1 kHz STANDARD : 32 kHz LONG1 : 22.05 kHz LONG2 : 16 kHz ANNOUNCE : Sound quality Amount of card memory consumed High Large 8 kHz The setting for the RDACGrade is made only for analog audio recording (selected connector: LINEIN, LINE+MIC-IN). For digital recording, the setting is made automatically. Small “S-HIGH” enables recording at the highest sound quality, but uses the most space on the card. “STANDARD” is best for ordinary recording. “ANNOUNCE” uses up the least card space, and is best for recording announcements, narration, and the like. When you are recording audio such as a narration with “ANNOUNCE” or “LONG2,” you can record with higher clarity by using the equalizer (external device) to cut the bass range. Select an RDAC -Grade that matches the circumstances of use. • If the type of card does not provide the recording time you want, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then perform recording again. • Depending on the card type, an error may appear or recording may stop. If this happens, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then perform recording again. Procedure for Setting the RDAC-Grade 1 2 Put the unit into recording standby. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “RDAC-Grade,” then press the dial. * You can set the RDAC-Grade only when you have selected “LINE-IN” or “LINE+MIC-IN” for the recording connector. fig.09-g05e 44 “Card-specific Recording Time Chart” → p. 133 “Error Messages” → p. 131 Recording Audio 3 Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Grade (ANNOUNCE, LONG2, LONG1, STANDARD, HIGH, or S-HIGH), then press the ENTER button. fig.09-g06e * Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button starts recording without locking in the setting. Basic Operations * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. • The display of remaining time on the card available for recording changes according to the selected RDAC-Grade. • Next, if you’re making the setting for “RDAC-Mode”, you can proceed to step 2 of the procedure for setting the RDAC-Mode. RDAC-Mode (Signal Processing System) The RDAC-Mode is a type of digital data processing system for recording. On the AR-3000, you can choose from among five types of modes. fig.09-03e (RDAC Mode) Sound Amount of card quality memory consumed *1 H-LINEAR : 24 bit PCM Recording LINEAR : 16 bit PCM Recording MODE3 : About 2.5 times the recording of Linear MODE2 : More than 2.5 times the recording of Linear MODE1 : About 4 times the recording of Linear High Large Small “H-LINEAR” enables recording at the highest sound quality, but uses the most space on the card. “MODE1” uses up the least card space, and is suited to long recording times. Select an RDAC-Mode that matches the circumstances of use. • If the type of card does not provide the recording time you want, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then perform recording again. “Card-specific Recording Time Chart” → p. 133 • Depending on the card type, an error may appear or recording may stop. If this happens, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then perform recording again. “Error Messages” → p. 131 45 Recording Audio * 1 Important Notes When Recording with MODE2 or MODE3 Recording times available when in MODE2 are about the same as in MODE3, or slightly longer. However, note that for phrases recorded in MODE2, you cannot make settings for some of the items in the phrase settings (Phrase Information (p. 54) and Phrase Editing (p. 66)). <Unsettable Items for Phrases Recorded in MODE2> ●Phrase Information • 1.3 Playback Point • 1.5 Loop Play ●Phrase Editing • 3.3 Phrase Truncate • 3.4 Phrase Split • 3.5 Phrase Join • 3.6 Level Normalize • 3.7 Time Stretch Procedure for Setting the RDAC-Mode 1 2 Put the unit into recording standby. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “RDAC-Mode,” then press the dial. fig.09-g07e 3 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the RDAC-Mode (MODE1, MODE2, MODE3, LINEAR, or H-LINEAR), then press the ENTER button. fig.09-g08e * Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button starts recording without locking in the setting. * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. 46 Recording Audio • The display of remaining time on the card available for recording changes according to the selected RDAC-Mode. • Next, if you’re making the setting for “Recording Type”, proceed to step 2 of the procedure for setting the recording type. If You’re Not Sure About Which Grade and Mode to Choose The optimal grade and mode vary according to the usage conditions, including the connected equipment, recording source, sound quality, time, and playback system. Basic Operations When a card is formatted, the RDAC-Grade is set to STANDARD and the RDAC-Mode is set to MODE3. First, try recording and playback with these settings. In most cases, this yields satisfactory sound quality. Recording Type (STEREO or MONO) Select either stereo recording or mono recording. Choosing mono recording gives you recording times that are twice as long as with stereo recording. Procedure for Setting the Recording Type 1 2 Put the unit into recording standby. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “REC Type,” then press the dial. fig.09-g09e 3 Turn the SELECTdial to choose the REC Type (STEREO or MONO), then press the ENTER button. fig.09-g10e * Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button starts recording without locking in the setting. * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. • The display of remaining time on the card available for recording changes according to the selected recording settings. 47 Recording Audio • Next, if you’re making the setting for the “Trigger Recording Settings”, proceed to step 2 of the procedure for making the trigger recording setting. Trigger Recording Settings (OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH) A method for starting recording automatically when audio higher than the trigger level (the volume level for starting recording) is input is called trigger recording. The following four types of trigger recording settings are available. • OFF: Trigger recording is not performed. • LOW: Recording starts when audio at a low volume level is input (-45 dBm). • MID: Recording starts when audio at an intermediate volume level is input (-36 dBm). • HIGH: Recording starts when audio at a high volume level is input (-27 dBm). ( ): Trigger level * You can make the trigger recording setting only when using analog audio recording (REC-In: LINE-IN/LINE+MIC-IN). * When you are recording from microphone input with the trigger level set at “LOW,” recording may be inadvertently started by ambient noise. If this happens, change the trigger level to MID or HIGH, or carry out recording in a quieter location. * If you quit recording without waiting for trigger recording to start, no phrase is created. Procedure for the Trigger Recording Setting 1 2 3 Put the unit into recording standby. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “Trig Level,” then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Trig Level (OFF, LOW, MID, or HIGH), then press the ENTER button. * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. 48 Recording Audio Adjusting the Recording Level Input audio from the connected device and adjust the recording level. If the input volume level is too high, a symbol(OVER) like the one shown below appears on the display. If this happens, adjust the recording level by lowering the volume on the connected device or turning the Input Volume Knob on the unit so that the symbol does not appear. fig.09-g13e Level meter (dB) Basic Operations Starting and Ending Recording 1 When the unit is in recording standby, pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button starts recording. During recording, the PLAY indicator lights up in red. • When you have made the trigger recording setting, the waits for audio input higher than the trigger level (the volume level at which recording starts), then starts recording. fig.09-g14e 2 Press the STOP button to end recording. * You cannot change the phrase number afterward, so be sure select the phrase number you want to record before you start recording. * Recording cannot span two cards inserted in the slots. When the free space on one card is used up, recording ends automatically. Starting and Stopping Recording with Control Input Terminals You can start and stop recording using a control input terminals. For information about making the settings, see “Assigning Phrases to Ports” for Direct playback (p. 88). 49 Recording Audio Checking What You Recorded After recording ends, you can play back the phrase by pressing the PLAY button. You can verify the phrase’s RDAC-Grade, RDAC-Mode, recording type, and recording time by viewing the display. fig.09-g15e Recording type RDAC-Grade Phrase name RDAC-Mode Recording time Information Recorded on the Card The AR-3000 stores recorded audio and MIDI signals on the card. It also stores all the setting information (such as MIDI settings) other than the unit’s setting (Contrast) on the card. This means you can switch all settings to the settings stored on a card simply by swapping cards. Important Note: About Setting Information Imported from a Card When you insert a card into slot, the unit imports setting information from the card. When a card is inserted in only one of the slots, the unit imports setting information from the card, but note the following points when cards are inserted into both slot A and slot B. The Following Setting Information Is Imported from the Card in Slot A • Control input settings • MIDI settings • RS-232C settings • AR-LINK settings • System settings * Note that when the settings just described on cards in slots A and B are different, the settings just described on the card in slot B do not take effect. The Following Setting Information Is Imported from Each Card • Recording settings • Phrase settings • Settings for card editing 50 Playback Using the Panel on the Unit (Manual Playback) fig.10-01e 1 1 3 2 Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot. Basic Operations 2 3 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to play. To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial. Press the PLAY button to play the phrase. During playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator lights up in green. • Pressing the PAUSE button pauses audio playback. While playback is paused, the PLAY (green) and PAUSE (red) indicators flash. To resume playback, press either the PLAY or the PAUSE button. Playback of audio phrases whose RDAC-Mode is MODE2 cannot be paused. • Pressing the STOP button ends playback. • During playback, you can choose the next song to play (without stopping the phrase being played) by turning the SELECT dial. Note that playback cannot be paused in the following cases: ● MIDI phrase (→ p. 82) ● Pattern phrase (→ p. 61) ● Song phrase (→ p. 64) ● Dual Mono mode (ON) (→ p. 119) Playback Location Search While paused, you can move the present phrase location forward or backward by turning the SELECT dial. To switch the unit of change, press the SELECT dial. (The units cycle through the sequence of frame → second → minute → hour.) Pressing the PLAY button again starts playback at the specified location. 51 Playback Using the Panel on the Unit Time Shown on the Display During playback or while playback is paused, you switch the time shown on the display between “Remaining Time (REMAIN)” and “Elapsed Time” by pressing the ENTER button. Elapsed Time Remaining Time This shows that it is the remaining time. 52 Applications 53 Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) Adding Information to Individual Phrases (Phrase Information) SCRUB: This mode performs loop play (scrub play) of a desired short passage (about 45 msec) in a phrase. During playback, you can move the playback passage by turning the SELECT dial. Use this to set a precise point for the playback point or the like. This adds a variety of information to recorded phrases (phrase information). Procedure If you want the phrase information when the card was formatted to remain unchanged, then you don’t need to change any settings. 1. At the various phrase setting screens, press the PLAY button when making settings such as phrase selections or playback points. A menu (window) for selecting the playback mode appears. Settings When a Card Is Formatted → p. 134 To check phrases during various settings, you can play back and stop phrases using the PLAY and STOP buttons (audio phrases only). Note that you cannot change settings during phrase playback. fig.playmode-1 * If PLAY is the only selected mode, phrase playback starts at this time. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback mode. 3. Press the PLAY button. The items that can be set differ according to the type of phrase (audio phrase, MIDI phrase, pattern phrase, or song phrase). Also refer to the Phrase Information/Phrase Setting Correspondence Table (p. 75). If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Playback starts, in the selected mode. * If you selected SCRUB, you can move the playback passage during playback by turning the SELECT dial. You can move the cursor (highlighting) by pressing the BACK button and the VALUE dial. Approximate guide to the location of the points for the entire phrase. 4. Pressing the STOP button ends playback. Depending on the location of the cursor on the screen, the playback mode may not be enabled. Play Volume (%) Three Useful Playback Modes for Phrase Settings The AR-3000 offers three playback modes that you can use during phrase settings that let you make point settings and the like, and check settings smoothly. * The playback modes that you can select vary according to the setting items. PLAY: This is the mode for normal playback. It plays back the entire phrase. Use it to check what a phrase includes. PREVIEW: This mode plays back phrases with the settings in effect. Playback is conducted for a fixed time according to the setting items. 54 This sets the volume level during playback of audio phrases. The volume level at the time of recording is considered to be 100%. Procedure for Setting the Play Volume 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.1 Play Volume,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Volume (from 10% to 100%), then press the dial. fig.11-g01e If you’re using Busy Out signals to start an amp or the like, inserting a delay time into the phrase that corresponds to the amp start time (that it, the time until sound is produced) can help prevent drop-out at the beginning of the phrase at the time of playback. Busy Out → p. 102 Procedure for Setting the Delay Time 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY button. This makes it possible to make the setting while monitoring the actual volume level. 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.2 Delay Time,” then press the dial. You can change the selected phrase by pressing the BACK button and moving the cursor to the phrase number. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Delay Time, then press the dial. fig.11-g02e 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Delay Time (00s 00f to 59s 29f) This sets the time until phrase playback starts. * The frame display varies according to the setting for the MIDI Time Code (MTC) frame rate. fig.11-01e Playback instruction (Play button, control input, etc.) Delay Time Phrase You can play back the selected phrase at the present setting by pressing the PLAY button. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Playback start 55 Applications 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) Playback Point (Start and End) These determine where phrase playback is to start and end. Turn the SELECT dial to set the end position (time), then press the dial. fig.11-02e Playback passage While setting the points, you can set the points while listening to the audio by using the SCRUB playback mode (p. 54). Phrase Start End * You can automatically seek and set points at the locations of silent portions (AUTO). Levels of -45 dBm or lower are treated as silent. fig.11-03e Silent portion Phrase Start To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. Playback passag Silent portion 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. End You can use the phrase-editing Truncate function (p. 67) to delete data outside the set points. Procedure for Setting Playback Point 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 2. Press the MODE button. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. The MODE indicator lights up. When Making the Settings Automatically 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.3 Playback Point,” then press the dial. 7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Auto as the playbackpoint setting method, then press the dial. You can reselect the phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. fig.11-g03e The start and end locations are set automatically. fig.11-g03ae When Making the Settings Manually 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose MANUAL as the playback-point setting method, then press the dial. fig.11-g03e Turn the SELECT dial to set the start position (time), then press the dial. You can make fine adjustments in the set points by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button, moving the entry position (highlighted) to the start or end location, and using the SCRUB playback mode (p. 54). * Each press of the BACK button moves the cursor (highlighted) in the sequence of sf → f →s → m → h. Pressing the dial while the cursor (highlighting) is at the "sf" position moves the end position setting. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. * The frame display varies according to the setting for the MIDI Time Code (MTC) frame rate. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 56 To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 9. Press the MODE button. fig.11-g04e This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Repeat Play (Repeat, Repeat Interval) This makes the settings for repeated playback of a phrase. Repeat passage: This is the passage set with the playback points (described earlier). (For example, when the number of repetitions is set to five times, the phrase is played back a total of six times.) When the number of repetitions is set to ON, playback repeats endlessly. Repeat Interval: This sets the playback interval as a time value. fig.11-04e Repeat Interval Phrase1 Phrase1 * The number of the repeat interval can be set only when repeat “ON” is selected. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Procedure for Making Repeat Play Settings Loop Play (Loop 1, Loop 2, Loop) 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. This makes the setting for loop playback of the desired passage of a phrase. Loop Playback starts at the start point (playback point), then after looping the specified number of times, playback ends at the end point (playback point). 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.4 Repeat Play,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. Loop:This sets the number of times playback is looped. (For example, when the number of loops is set to five times, the looped phrase is played back a total of six times.) When the number of loops is set to Endless, playback loops endlessly. Loop 1:This specifies the return point for looping. Loop 2:This specifies the repeat point for looping. fig.11-05e Loop passage 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Repeat (OFF/ON/1 to 99), then press the dial. Phrase Loop 1 Loop 2 57 Applications Repeat: This sets the number of times playback is repeated. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Repeat Interval (from 00 m 00 s to 59 m 59 s), then press the dial. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 6. Press the MODE button. Loop Play is not possible when in the Dual Mono mode. Procedure for Making Loop Play Settings 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.5 Loop Play,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Loop (OFF/ON/1 to 99), then press the dial. fig.11-g05e This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. If a start or end playback point is set within the looped interval, the start point is set to Loop 1 and the end point is set to Loop 2. Fade (Fade In and Fade Out) This makes the settings for starting phrase playback with a Fade In and ending playback with a Fade Out. This sets the time until the playback level is reached from silence (Fade In) and the time until silence is reached from the playback level (Fade Out). Turn the SELECT dial to set the Loop 1 position (time), then press the dial. Pressing the dial while the cursor (highlighting) is at the "sf" position moves the Loop 2 position setting. fig.11-06e Phrase Fade In (Time) * The time that is set is shown as a relative amount of time, with the start position of the playback point taken to be 0. * Each press of the BACK button moves the cursor (highlighted) in the sequence of sf → f → s → m → h. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Loop 2 position (time), then press the dial. Fade Out (Time) If there is noise or the like at the beginning or end of a phrase, you can cause the noise component not to be played back simply by setting the Fade In or Fade Out times to Time 1 through Time 3. * Loop 1 and Loop 2 and the number of loops can be set only when loop “ON” is selected. Time1: Set at approx. 10 msec. * The looped region cannot be set to 1 frames or less. Time3: Set at approx. 50 msec. Time2: Set at approx. 30 msec. fig.11-07e Removal effect when noise or the like is present You can set the points while listening to the audio by using the SCRUB playback mode (p. 54). You can check the Loop 1 and Loop 2 junctures using the Preview playback mode. Phrase 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 58 Around 10 to 50 milliseconds Setting the Fade In or Fade Out time to about 5 seconds is an Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) effective way to produce a normal Fade In (crescendo), or Fade Out (decrescendo) effect. fig.11-08e Fade In (crescendo) /Fade Out (decrescendo) effect Phrase about 5 sec about 5 sec When you use the Stop button (or other means) to stop a phrase during playback for which this setting has been made, the phrase stops with a Fade Out. If you don’t want a Fade Out, pressing the Stop button again stops the phrase immediately. entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Fade settings may not be properly reflected in situations such as the following: • When the set fade time is longer than the phrase. • When fade-in and fade-out settings overlap. • When loop-interval settings and fade settings overlap. Procedure for Making the Settings for Fade In or Fade Out 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. This makes the setting for Control Out operation after phrase playback ends. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.6 Fade,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade In (time: OFF, Time 1 to Time 3, or from 00.1 to 59.9 seconds), then press the dial. fig.11-g06e Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade Out (time: OFF, Time 1 to Time 3, or from 00.1 to 59.9 seconds), then press the dial. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. For detailed information on how to use Control Out, refer to “Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 (Control Output Terminal)” (p. 102). Procedure for Making the Control Out Settings 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.7 Control Out,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Control Out (OFF or ON), then press the dial. fig.11-g07e To quit without making the setting, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous Turn the SELECT dial to set the Offset Time (from 00m00s to 59m59s), then press the dial. * The offset time can be set only when Control Out “ON” is 59 Applications 2. Press the MODE button. Control Out Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) selected. fig.11-g08e 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Changing the Playback Tempo for MIDI Phrases (MIDI Playback Tempo) This changes the playback tempo for MIDI phrases. You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY button. This makes it possible to make the setting while monitoring the actual tempo. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Phrase Name For detailed information about how to use MIDI phrases, refer to the chapter “Recording and Playing MIDI Phrases” (p. 82). This assigns a name to a phrase. You can enter a phrase name of up to 12 characters. (For a phrase that has already been recorded, the phrase name is the card name plus the phrase number.) Procedure for Setting the MIDI Tempo Procedure for Setting the Phrase Name 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting you want to change. 2. Press the MODE button. 2. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. The MODE indicator lights up. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.8 MIDI Tempo,” then press the dial. 3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.9 Phrase Name,” then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the MIDI tempo (from 5 to 260), then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose a character. Press the dial to confirm the selected character. 60 Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) fig.11-g09e Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet (upper case) space numerals ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { } To check phrases during various settings, you can play back and stop phrases using the PLAY and STOP buttons (audio phrases only). Note that you cannot change settings during phrase playback. → (p. 54) FWD: This advances the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial advances the entry location by one. BACK: This moves back the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial moves back the entry location by one. INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a single space. DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a single character. END: To finish the process. 5. To finish the save process, then in step 4, turn the SELECT dial to choose End, then press the dial. If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). fig.11-g10e 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 7. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. You can combine a number of phrases to create a new phrase (pattern phrase). A pattern phrase is a stored combination of phrases that have already been recorded. A pattern phrase is also treated as a single phrase. Creating pattern phrases makes it possible to create and start a variety of combined-phrase patterns while saving card memory space. Specific Examples First, make actual recordings of three phrases like the ones described below. A0001: “Thank you for coming” A0002: “Today” A0003: “Despite the bad weather” Combine these three to create a pattern phrase. Creating Combinations of Phrases (Phrase Combination) You can create new phrases by combining a number of phrases already recorded and storing the result as a different phrase. There are two types of methods for creating phrase combinations: pattern phrases and song phrases. 61 Applications Combinations of Phrase Units (Pattern Phrases) Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) ● You can assign a phrase any number of times to a single pattern phrase, or to more than one pattern phrase. fig.11-09e Actual phrase A0001 Thank you for coming ● You can assign pattern phrases that have already been created to other pattern phrases. fig.11-11e Actual phrase A0002 Pattern Phrase A0025 Today A0011 A0017 A0018 A0013 A0019 A0020 A0021 A0015 A0016 Actual phrase A0003 Despite the bad weather Pattern Phrase Pattern Phrase A0012 A0014 : Single Phrase Pattern Phrase A0004 : Pattern Phrase * When a hierarchy of two or more levels of pattern phrases is assigned, playback may not be correct. A0001 A0002 fig.11-11ae Pattern Phrase A0005 Pattern Phrase A0025 A0001 A0002 A0003 A0011 A0017 A0018 A0013 A0019 A0020 A0015 A0016 : Single Phrase : Pattern Phrase A0004: “Thank you for coming today” (for sunny days) Pattern Phrase Pattern Phrase A0012 A0014 A0005: “Thank you for coming today, despite the bad weather.” (for rainy days) : Single Phrase Set A0004 or A0005 to start on playback. : Pattern Phrase Phrases 0001 through 0005 are used, but the phrases actually recorded (the actual phrases) are only 0001, 0002, and 0003. A0017 A0018 Pattern Phrase A0019 ● You can also assign MIDI phrases to pattern phrases. ● You can assign up to 100 phrases to a single pattern phrase. ● You can assign a mixture of audio phrases and MIDI phrases. ● You can set the phrase playback sequence (pattern phrase mode) to SEQ or to RANDOM 1, 2, or 3. ● Song phrases that have already been created (p. 64) cannot be assigned to pattern phrases. About Pattern Phrase Playback Methods (Pattern Phrase Modes) → p. 63 ● The playback volume level for phrases is set at 100% of the volume level when recorded. (The overall volume level for each pattern phrase is set with phrase information 1.1 Play Volume.) “Playback Point” and “Fade settings” included in the phrase information for phrases assigned to a pattern phrase remain in effect, but other phrase information is disregarded. Because the volume level set for a phrase alone is disregarded, to adjust the volume, adjust the volume setting for the pattern phrase. * This setting cannot be made for MIDI phrases. ● The interval sets the time between playback of one phrase and the next phrase. fig.11-10e Pattern Phrase A0010 A0006 A0007 A0008 Volume (%) A0009 Interval (time) Playback volume for the entire pattern phrase (A0010) (Phrase Information 1.1 Play Volume) 62 • When you are creating a pattern phrase, you can choose actual phrases from both card A and card B, but note that the pattern phrase is not played back correctly if the card containing the constituent phrase is not inserted at the time of playback. (If a constituent phrase does not exist, the unit seeks and plays back the next phrase.) • Song phrases that have already been created cannot be assigned to a pattern phrase. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) About Pattern Phrase Playback Methods (Pattern Phrase Modes) There are four types of pattern-phrase playback methods (pattern phrase modes), which are described below. Choose the one that matches your usage conditions. SEQ: This plays back the phrases in the sequence in which they were assigned. RANDOM1: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001 through No. 100 at random. RANDOM2: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001 through No. 100 at random, while allowing you to insert another phrase once at a set number of times (interrupt phrase interval of 1 to 25). The interrupt phrase is selected sequentially from phrases No. 101 through 128. RANDOM3: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001 through No. 100 at random, while allowing you to insert another phrase once at a set number of times (interrupt phrase interval of 1 to 25). The interrupt phrase is selected randomly from phrases No. 101 through 128. fig.11-12e No.001–No.100 * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the empty phrase for creating a new pattern phrase or the pattern phrase whose settings you want to change, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the pattern phrase mode (SEQ, RANDOM1, RANDOM2, or RANDOM3), then press the dial. fig.11-g11e * The interrupt phrase interval described below can be set only when you have selected RANDOM2 or RANDOM3. If you selected SEQ or RANDOM1, proceed to step 7. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to set the interrupt phrase interval (from 1 to 25), then press the dial. Playback in stored sequence fig.11-g12e RANDOM1 No.001–No.100 Random playback 7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback sequence, then press the dial. RANDOM2 No.001–No.100 Random playback fig.11-g13e No.101–No.128 in stored sequence Interrupted once per specified number of times RANDOM3 No.001–No.100 Random playback No.101–No.128 in random • If you selected SEQ or RANDOM1, assign phrases in playback order No. 001 through No. 100. • If you selected RANDOM2 or RANDOM3, assign phrases in playback order No. 001 through No. 100, and also assign interrupt phrases to No. 101 through No. 128. END: To finish making settings. Interrupted once per specified number of times * With random playback, once a phrase has been played back it is not chosen again. 8. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. fig.11-g14e Procedure for Creating a Pattern Phrase 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “2.1 Pattern Phrase,” then press the dial. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. 9. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to assign, then press the dial. * Only assignable phrases are displayed. 63 Applications SEQ 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing an empty phrase for creating a new pattern phrase or the pattern phrase whose settings you want to change, then press the dial. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) * If phrases are assigned in the playback order you selected in step 7, then selecting “-----” cancels the phrase assignment. (However, even after the assignment is canceled, the playback volume and interval information is retained.) 10. Turn the SELECT dial to set the playback volume for the assigned phrase (from 10% to 100%), then press the dial. * If the assigned phrase is a MIDI phrase, you cannot set the playback volume level. fig.11-g15e Turn the SELECT dial to set the interval for the assigned phrase (from 00.0 to 59.9 sec), then press the dial. 11. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to assign phrases. • The screen displays the total time for the pattern phrase. fig.11-g16e When Playing Back Narration with Pattern Phrases With narrations that use pattern phrases, the proper treatment of silent portions is important in order to make the narration sound more natural and easier to understand. This issue can be addressed as follows: • Adjust the interval for the pattern phrase. • Use trigger recording (p. 48) to avoid recording silent portions. • Use the playback point phrase settings (p. 56), and the phrase-editing “Truncate feature (p. 67) to delete silent portions that might be perceived as being odd. Time-based Combinations (Song Phrases) You can paste together a number of phrases in temporal (time-flow) order to create a new phrase (song phrase). * If “-----” is assigned at a number, the interval time for the previous assigned phrase is not added to the total time. 12. To cancel the save process, then in step 7, turn the SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial. A song phrase is a stored combination of phrases that have already been recorded. A song phrase is also treated as a single phrase. By creating song phrases, you can create time-based phrases, while saving card memory space. fig.11-g17e Specific Examples Try setting the time frame for playback at 15 minutes. Prepare phrases like the ones described below. 13. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. A0030: A 5-minute song To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. A0032: A 30-second announcement Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. A0034: A 6-minute song 14. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 64 A0031: A 3-minute song A0033: A 15-second announcement Paste these phrases on a time axis to create song phrase A0035 having a total time of 15 minutes. fig.11-13e Song Phrase A0035 A0033 A0030 A0032 A0031 A0034 *1 15 minutes : Start point of phrase (time) : End point of song phrase (time) *1 If the start point (time) for phrase A0034 is set at a time that overlaps with phrase A0031, playback of A0031 is interrupted and playback of A0034 starts. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) • You can assign up to 100 phrases to a single song phrase. fig.11-g18e • You can assign a phrase any number of times to a single song phrase, or to more than one song phrase. END:To finish making settings. Playback points and fade settings included in the phrase information for phrases assigned to a song phrase remain in effect, but other phrase information is disregarded. Note that a phrase is assigned to a song phrase in the same state as when it was just recorded (that is, the state before phraseinformation settings are made). When you are creating a song phrase, you can choose actual phrases from both card A and card B, but note that the pattern phrase is not played back correctly if the card containing the constituent phrase is not inserted at the time of playback. (If a constituent phrase does not exist, silence is heard until the start point [time] for the next phrase is reached.) • Song phrases that have already been created cannot be assigned to a song phrase. • Pattern phrases that have already been created cannot be assigned to a song phrase. fig.11-g19e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. * Only assignable phrases are displayed. -----:If a phrase is assigned at the assignment number you selected in step 5, then this cancels the phrase assignment. (However, even after the assignment is canceled, point information is retained.) STOP: Select this when you want to specify an ending point (time) for the song phrase. (In the specific example on p. 64, this is set at 15 minutes in step 7.) 7. Turn the SELECT dial to set the point (time) to start the assigned phrase, then press the dial. fig.11-g20e • MIDI phrases cannot be assigned to a song phrase. Procedure for Creating a Song Phrase 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “2.2 Song Phrase,” then press the dial. If you selected Stop in step 6, then set the end point (time) for the song phrase and press the dial. (In the specific example on p. 64, this is set at 00 h 15 m 00 s 00 f 0 sf.) 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to assign phrases. • The screen displays the total time for the song phrase. fig.11-g21e 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing an empty phrase for creating a new song phrase or the song phrase whose settings you want to change, then press the dial. Total Time * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. 9. To cancel the save process, then in step 5, turn the SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the empty phrase for creating a new song phrase or the song phrase whose settings you want to change, then press the dial. 10. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the assignment number (from No. 001 to No. 100), then press the dial. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 11. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual 65 Applications Conditions for Creating Song Phrases 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Modifying Phrases Themselves (Phrase Edit) This is used to modify (edit) recorded phrases. For settings when a card is formatted, refer to p. 134. To confirm phrases when making settings, you can use the PLAY and STOP buttons to play and stop phrases and the PAUSE button to pause phrases (audio phrases only), and the SELECT dial to move the playback location forward and backward (audio phrases only). Note that you cannot change Deleting a Phrase (Phrase Delete) This deletes a phrase. You can also delete a continuous group of phrases in a batch. Procedure for Deleting a Phrase 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.1 Phrase Delete,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the beginning phrase you want to delete, then press the dial. fig.11-g22e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to delete, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to delete, then press the dial. fig.11-g23e settings during phrase playback. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. • Items that can be set differ according to the type of phrase (audio phrase, MIDI phrase, pattern phrase, or song phrase). Also refer to the Phrase Information/ Phrase Setting Correspondence Table (p. 75). • When editing a phrase, you cannot overwrite a phrase itself except by using the phrase delete or truncate functions. Make sure there is enough free space to carry out phrase editing. • If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). 66 * To delete a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the beginning phrase and the final phrase. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) Deleting Audio Outside the Playback Points (Phrase Truncate) This deletes data outside the points set with the Playback Point phrase information (p. 56). You can also truncate a continuous group of phrases in a batch. fig.11-17e Playback passage Phrase Start End Truncate acts upon and modifies the selected phrase itself. Care must be taken, since once it has been executed, the phrase cannot be restored to its original state. Phrase Truncate Procedure The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.2 Phrase Truncate,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the beginning phrase for truncation, then press the dial. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Copying a Phrase (Phrase Copy) This copies a phrase. You can also copy a continuous group of phrases in a batch. Important Notes About Copying a Continuous Group of Phrases in a Batch Example: Copying a continuous range of phrases from A0050 to A0053 If A0052 happens to be a used empty phrase, then specify a continuous group of three empty phrases as the beginning. (The system seeks and displays only writable phrases.) fig.11-14e A0050 fig.11-g26e Copy range A0051 A0052 empty A0053 * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Phrase Copy Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for truncation, then press the dial. A0060 * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. A0061 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase for truncation, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. A0062 Three continuous empty phrases at the write destination * To truncate a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the beginning phrase and the final phrase. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. Important Notes About Copying Pattern Phrases or Song Phrases To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. For pattern phrases and song phrases, only the combination information is copied. Note that the actual constituent phrases are not copied. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. Example: 5. Press the MODE button. ● When a pattern phrase or song phrase on the same card is copied This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual → The actual constituent phrases exist, so playback is correct. 67 Applications 1. Press the MODE button. screen. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) * To copy a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the beginning phrase and the final phrase. fig.11-15e Pattern Phrase Song Phrase constituent phrases A0012 A0015 A0016 A0017 A0018 A0019 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. fig.11-g25e Phrase Copy * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. A0030 ● When a pattern phrase or song phrase is copied between different cards (A → B) → Playback is correct while card A is inserted in the slot (and the actual phrases are present), but if card A is removed or card B is inserted into slot A, the actual constituent phrases are no longer present, and so playback is not correct. To ensure that a pattern phrase or song pattern copied to a different card (A → B) is played back correctly, copy the actual constituent phrases separately to card B. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for the write destination, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. fig.11-16e Pattern Phrase Song Phrase constituent phrases A0012 A0015 A0016 A0017 A0018 A0019 6. Press the MODE button. Phrase Copy B0001 Procedure for Copying a Phrase 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.3 Phrase Copy,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the beginning phrase of the copy source, then press the dial. fig.11-g24e This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Deviding a Phrase (Phrase Divide) This splits a phrase at the location you specify, creating two phrases. fig.11-19e Deviding point * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase at the copy source, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase of the copy source, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 68 Phrase 1 Two phrases Phrase 2 Phrase 3 Procedure for Deviding a Phrase 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.4 Phrase Devide,” then press the dial. 7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to split, then press the dial. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. fig.11-g28e 8. Press the MODE button. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to split, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the split point (time), then press the dial. fig.11-g29e * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Applications You can set the points while listening to the audio by using the SCRUB playback mode (p. 54). Also, you can use TO (to split point) and FROM (from split point) to listen to audio for a fixed time before and after the split point. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. Joining Phrases (Phrase Combine) This joins two phrases, creating a single phrase. fig.11-20e (Phrase Join) 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write destination 1, then press the dial. Src 1 Src 2 Phrase1 Phrase 2 fig.11-g30e Destination 1 One phrase Destination 2 Phrase 3 * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write destination 1, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write destination 2, then press the dial. fig.11-g31e * Phrase Join cannot be executed unless the RDAC-Grade, RDAC-Mode, and recording type are the same for both phrases. Procedure for Joining Phrases 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.5 Phrase Join,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the first phrase to join (Src1), then press the dial. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write destination 2, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. fig.11-g32e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the first phrase to join (Src1), 69 Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the second phrase to join (Src2), then press the dial. fig.11-g33e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the second phrase to join (Src2), then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. fig.11-g34e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 7. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 70 Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) Expanding or Compressing the Playback Time Without Changing the Pitch (Time Stretch) This expands or compresses a phrase’s playback time without changing its pitch. You can set a value within a range of -20.0% to +20.0% of the phrase’s original playback time. * The playback time after stretching is displayed simultaneously. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 7. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. Time Stretch Procedure * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.6 Time Stretch,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase whose time you want to stretch, then press the dial. fig.11-g37e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose time you want to stretch, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the degree of stretching (from -20.0% to +20.0%), then press the dial. fig.11-g38e Original playback time Playback time after stretching 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. fig.11-g39e * Only executable cards are displayed. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase, then press the dial. 71 Applications The displayed playback time after stretching is only a rough guide, and may not match the actual playback time after conversion. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) Converting a Phrase’s Recording Settings (Phrase Convert) This converts the recording-setting items RDAC-Mode and recording type to other settings while leaving phrase content unchanged. RDAC-Mode (Signal Processing Format) • H-LINEAR: 24-bit PCM recording • LINEAR: 16-bit PCM recording simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases are of the same recording type.) <Conversion of a single stereo phrase to a single mono phrase: STEREO → MONO> fig.11-22e Stereo Phrase Phrase 1 Mono Phrase One phrase Phrase 2 You can also convert the recording type in the same way. <Conversion of a single stereo phrase to two mono phrases: STEREO → MONO 1, 2> fig.11-23e Mono Phrase (L ch of Phrase 1) • MODE3: Approximately 2.5 times the recording time available with LINEAR • MODE2: Approximately 2.5 times the recording time available with LINEAR, or longer Phrase 2 Stereo Phrase Phrase 1 • MODE1: Approximately 4 times the recording time available with LINEAR The RDAC mode is converted at times like these. • When conducting Dual Mono mode (p. 119) two-channel simultaneous playback (In the Dual Mono mode, simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases are uniformly RDAC-Mode.) • When conducting multiple-unit simultaneous playback with AR-LINK (p. 122) (With AR-LINK playback, simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases are uniformly RDAC-Mode.) • When phrases recorded with H-LINEAR or MODE3 on the AR-3000 are used on the AR-2000 or the like (HLINEAR and MODE3 phrases cannot be used unchanged on the AR-2000.) Please be aware that conversion to a higher level does not enhance the sound quality. Recording Type Two phrases Mono Phrase (R ch of Phrase 1) Phrase 3 <Conversion of two mono phrases to a single stereo phrase: MONO 1, 2 → STEREO> fig.11-24e Mono Phrase Phrase 1 Stereo Phrase One phrase Mono Phrase Phrase 2 Phrase 3 L ch: Phrase 1 R ch: Phrase 2 Procedure for Phrase Convert ● Converting the RDAC-Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.7 Phrase Convert,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Mode, then press the dial. fig.11-g44e • STEREO • MONO The recording type is converted at times like these. • When conducting two-channel simultaneous playback in the Dual Mono mode (p. 122)(In the Dual Mono mode, simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases are mono.) • When conducting multiple-unit simultaneous playback with AR-LINK (p. 122) (With AR-LINK playback, 72 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Mode type (HLINEAR/LINEAR/MODE3/MODE2/MODE1), then press the dial. fig.11-g44e Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the beginning phrase you want to convert, then press the dial. and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. fig.11-g45e Even if there are phrases in "Phrase range" that have the same RDAC-Mode as the set RDAC-Mode, it is written unchanged as a new phrase. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. * To convert a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the beginning phrase and the final phrase. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.7 Phrase Convert,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording type, then press the dial. fig.11-g47ae 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording-type conversion method (STEREO → MONO, STEREO → MONO 1, 2, or MONO 1, 2 → STEREO), then press the dial. fig.11-g48e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for the write destination, then press the dial. fig.11-g47e * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. When “STEREO → MONO” Is Selected 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the beginning phrase you want to convert, then press the dial. fig.11-g49e 7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 8. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. * To convert a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the beginning phrase and the final phrase. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, 73 Applications fig.11-g46e ● Converting the Recording Type Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. 7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write destination 2 (MONO2), then press the dial. fig.11-g50e fig.11-g54e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. 7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for the write destination, then press the dial. fig.11-g51e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write destination 2, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 9. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. ● When “STEREO → MONO 1, 2” Is Selected To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 9. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. ● When “MONO 1, 2 → STEREO” Is Selected 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the first mono phrase 1 (MONO1) you want to convert, then press the dial. fig.11-g55e 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the stereo phrase you want to convert, then press the dial. fig.11-g52e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the stereo phrase to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write destination 1 (MONO1), then press the dial. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the first mono phrase 1 to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the second mono phrase 2 (MONO2) you want to convert, then press the dial. fig.11-g56e fig.11-g53e * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write destination 1, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 74 Turn the SELECT dial to choose the second mono phrase 2 to convert, then press the dial. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings) 7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination card, then press the dial. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. fig.11-g57e 9. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase, then press the dial. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. * Only phrases that can be executed are displayed. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Phrase Information/Phrase Setting Correspondence Table fig.11-25e Phrases 1 Phrase Information 3 Phrase Edit Dual Mono Mode (ON) RDAC-Mode: MODE2 RDAC-Mode: except MODE2 MIDI Pattern Song AR-LINK Playback ●1.1 Play Volume O O X O O O *2 O ●1.2 Delay Time O O O O O O *2 O ●1.3 Playback Point O X X X X O *2 O ●1.4 Repeat Play O O O O O X ●1.5 Loop Play O X X X X X ●1.6 Fade O O X X X O ●1.7 Control Out O O O O O X X ●1.8 MIDI Tempo X X O X X X X ●1.9 Phrase Name O O O O O O O ●3.1 Phrase Delete O O O O O ●3.2 Phrase Truncate O X X X ●3.3 Phrase Copy O O O O ●3.4 Phrase Divide O X X X X ●3.5 Phrase Combine O X X X X ●3.6 Time Stretch O X X X X ●3.7 Phrase Convert O O X X X Phrase Settings Audio O X *2 O X *1 O *1 *1 The actual constituent phrases are not copied. *2 The AR-LINK slave operates in accord with the data from the master. 75 Applications O : Can be set X : Not set Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards You can make batch settings and edits for individual cards. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card to delete (A or B), then press the dial. fig.12-g01e If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), note that the operation halts with an error message, and the operation cannot be resumed until the card or card is removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Making a Card Usable on the AR3000 (Card Format) When you use a new card or a card used previously on a device other than the unit, you must first format the card. For an explanation of how to format the card, refer to “Formatting a Card” (p. 30). 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. Copying a Card (Card Copy) Performing formatting erases all data on the card. Before you format the card, make sure it contains no data you don’t want to lose. Deleting All Phrases on a Card (Card Delete) This deletes all the phrases on a card. Please be aware that performing a Card Delete operation deletes all phrase data. (This returns the card to the state it was in when freshly formatted.) This copies the data on the card in slot A to the card in slot B. Card A and card B don't have to be the same size (capacity), but unless the usable space on card B is larger than the space used on card A, you cannot copy everything on card A to card B. Please be aware that performing a “Card Copy” operation deletes (overwrites) the data on card B. A card in AR-2000 format cannot be copied as-is. To copy a card in AR-2000 format, use Card Convert to convert it to AR-3000 format, then copy the card. Card Delete Procedure 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.2 Card Delete,” then press the dial. Card Convert → p. 78 Card Copy Procedure 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.3 Card Copy (A→B),” then press the dial. 3. Insert the card to copy from into slot A and the card to copy to into slot B, then press the SELECT dial. * Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots. 76 Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. Protecting a Card (Card Protect) This prohibits such card operations as saving, overwriting, deleting, and editing. (However, playback and copying phrases to another card are still possible.) Procedure for Making the Card Protect Setting 1. Press the MODE button. Copying Just the Settings (Setting Copy) • Control input settings 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.5 Card Protect,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card you want to protect (A or B), then press the dial. fig.12-g02e • MIDI settings • RS-232C settings • AR-LINK settings • System settings You cannot copy settings to a card that has a different format (that is, you cannot copy settings from a card in AR-2000 format to a card in AR-3000 format, or vice versa). Setting Copy Procedure 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Card Protect (OFF or ON), then press the dial. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. 1. Press the MODE button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. The MODE indicator lights up. 6. Press the MODE button. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.4 Setting Copy (A→B),” then press the dial. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. 3. Insert the card to copy from into slot A and the card to copy to into slot B, then press the SELECT dial. * Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. 77 Applications This copies the following setting information stored on the card in slot A to the card in slot B. The MODE indicator lights up. Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards Changing the Name of a Card (Card Name) 5. To quit saving, turn the SELECT dial to choose “END” in step 3, then press the dial. fig.12-g04e This changes the name assigned to a card when it was formatted (p. 30). When you record a phrase, this card name is automatically added to the beginning of the phrase name. You can enter a card name of up to eight characters. Example: Card name before change: MESSAGE → Phrase name: MESSAGE 1 Card name after change: ENTRANCE If you record a new phrase 0002 after changing the card name, it is given “ENTRANCE 2” as the phrase name. * The name of phrase 0001, which was recorded before changing the card name, remains unchanged (“MESSAGE 1”). * In a phrase name, the number after the card name indicates the phrase number. Procedure for Changing the Card Name 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.6 Card Name,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card whose name you want to change (A or B), then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose a character. Press the dial to confirm the selected character. fig.12-g03e • Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet (uppercase) space numerals - ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { } • FWD: This advances the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial advances the entry location by one. • BACK: This moves back the location for entering a character. Pressing the dial moves back the entry location by one. • INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a single space. • DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a single character. • END: This finishes the setting process. 78 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 7. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. Making Cards for Legacy Models Usable on the AR-3000 (Card Convert) ■ What Is Card Convert? With the AR-3000, you can play back cards in AR-2000 format (from models AR-2000/100/1) without having to make any changes, but you cannot edit or change settings (write or rewrite) on such cards. Also, the legacy models AR-2000/100/1 can play back cards in AR-3000 format without having to make any changes, but cannot be used to edit or change settings (write or rewrite) on such cards. “Card Convert” is a feature that lets you take a card in AR2000 format and play it back, change settings, and edit (write or overwrite) it with the AR-3000, or vice versa. Card Compatibility with Other Models in the AR Series → p. 33 ■ Conversion of New Functions on the AR-3000 When you convert a card in AR-3000 format to a card in AR2000 format, the AR-3000 setting items are converted as shown in the “Card Conversion Chart” (p. 80). Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards On legacy models such as the AR-2000, items set on the AR3000 are grouped into the following four types. • Effective without change • Converted to similar values • Not valid • Result in an error and halt conversion reduce the amount of data on the copy-source card, such as by deleting unneeded phrases. Procedure for Card Convert 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.7 Card Convert,” then press the dial. • Cards for which the maximum number of phrases was set at 1,000 when formatted cannot be converted. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Convert, then press the dial. • The settings for items which are not valid or are converted to similar values are lost and cannot be recovered even by formatting the AR-3000 again. fig.12-g05e Also, for items which result in an error and cause conversion to stop, it is necessary to perform processing such as phrase conversion, truncating phrases, and backing up and deleting to eliminate the cause of the error. (For information on errorcausing items and remedies, refer to “Conversion Error List” (p. 80).) ■ Conversion Using a Single Card and Conversion Using Two Cards With Card Convert, in addition to converting a single card (the card itself), you can perform conversion while copying one card (the source) to another card (the destination). We recommend converting using two cards when you want to leave what is on the card unconverted. When you perform conversion using two cards, insert the copy-source card into slot A and the copy-destination card into slot B. When you are converting using two cards, the copy-source card and the copy-destination card don’t have to be the same size (capacity), but you can perform Card Convert only when the usable space on the destination card is larger than the space used on the source card. When you convert data in AR-2000 format to AR-3000 format, the amount of data after conversion increases slightly. This means that even if you are converting the same card (conversion using a single card) or two cards that have the same capacity (conversion using two cards), it may not be possible to perform conversion if there is no more free space or if there is little free space remaining. If this happens, then • AR-2000 → AR-3000: This converts a card in AR-2000 format to AR-3000 format. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Card you want to convert, then press the dial. fig.12-g06e • A → A: This converts a single card (the card itself). • A → B: This converts card A (the copy source) to card B (the copy destination). * Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. 79 Applications • If you are using the AR-3000 to perform recording or editing on a card used on an AR-2000, we recommend making settings only for items that remain effective without change when the card is converted to AR-2000 format. • AR-3000 → AR-2000: This converts a card in AR-3000 format to AR-2000 format. Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards Card Conversion Chart/Conversion Error Chart fig.12-01e Card Conversion (AR-3000→AR-2000)Chart * This chart shows compatibility for converted cards used on the AR-2000. When you're using on the AR-100 or AR-1, refer to the owner's manual for the respective device. 1 Phrase Information ❍ ◆ ✕ ▲ Effective without change Converted to similar values Not valid Result in an error and halt conversion State of recording settings ●Selecting the Recording Connector LINE-IN ◆ MIDI Rec: OFF ◆ MIDI Rec: OFF LINE+MIC-IN ◆ MIDI Rec: OFF DIGITAL-IN ◆ MIDI Rec: ON MIDI-IN ●RDAC-Grade ANNOUNCE ❍ ❍ LONG2 ❍ LONG1 ❍ STANDARD ❍ HIGH ◆ HIGH S-HIGH ●RDAC-Mode MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 LINEAR H-LINEAR ❍ ❍ ◆ MODE2 ❍ ◆ LINEAR ●Recording Type ❍ ❍ ●Trigger Recording Settings OFF ❍ ❍ LOW ❍ MID ❍ HIGH ●MIDI Time Base 192 ❍ ❍ 240 STEREO MONO ●1.1 Playback Volume (10%--100%) ❍ ●1.2 Delay Time (00s00f–59s29f) ◆ Conversion of frames to seconds ●1.3 Playback Point ▲ Error when playback point is set ●1.4 Repeat Play OFF ❍ ❍ ON ✕ Repeat (1–99) ❍ Repeat Interval (00m00s–59m59s) ●1.5 Loop Play ✕ Disabled ●1.6 Fade ✕ Disabled ●1.7 Control Out OFF ❍ ❍ ON ❍ Offset Time (00m00s–59m59s) ●1.8 MIDI Playback Tempo (5–260) ❍ ●1.9 Phrase Name ◆ Up to 11 characters 2 Phrase Combination ●2.1 Pattern Phrase Pattern Phrase Modes SEQUENTIAL RANDOM1 RANDOM2 RANDOM3 Interrupt phrase interval (1–25) Playback sequence (No.001–128) Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000) Volume (10%–100%) Interval (00.0s–59.9s) ●2.2 Song phrase ●RDAC-Grade ANNOUNCE LONG2 LONG1 STANDARD HIGH S-HIGH ●4.1 Card Format Select Max Phrases 250 500 1000 ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ●MIDI Time Base 192 240 ❍ ❍ ▲ ●4.5 Card Protect ●4.6 Card Name ❍ ◆ Recording Phrase Protection ❍ ●5.1 Control Input Mode DIRECT PLAY PROGRAM PLAY BINARY PLAY TERMINAL REC ❍ ❍ ❍ ◆ BINARY1 ●5.2 Direct Play ●Recording Type STEREO MONO ▲ Error when song phrase is present 5 Settings for Control Input ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ●RDAC-Mode MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 LINEAR H-LINEAR ❍ ◆ RANDOM ◆ RANDOM ◆ RANDOM ✕ Disabled ◆ Valid for No. 001 through 100 ❍ Valid for No. 001 through 500 ▲ Error when 501 or more are present ✕ Disabled ❍ 4 Settings for Card Editing OFF ON Recording settings for recorded phrased ▲ Error when pattern phrase is assigned to pattern phrase ❍ ❍ Normal First-In Last-In Sequence Phrase assignment (1–16) Assigned phrase (PLAY,-----,A0001–B1000) ●5.3 Program Play Program (1–5) Played back in order Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000) ❍ ◆ Normal ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Valid for No. 001 through 500 ▲ Error when 501 or more are present ❍ ❍ ❍ Valid for No. 001 through 500 ▲ Error when 501 or more are present ●5.4 Binary Play <Level: Edge> OFF: OFF ON: OFF OFF: ON ON: ON ◆ Trigger Mode: Level ❍ Trigger Mode: Level ❍ Trigger Mode: Edge ◆ Trigger Mode: Level ●5.5 Terminal Recording Phrase select BINARY1 BINARY2 80 ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards fig.12-02e Conversion Error Chart In situations like the ones described below, an error occurs and conversion stops. Take action as described in the remedy, then carry out card conversion again. 6 MIDI settings ▲When there is insufficient space on the destination card for conversion ●6.1 MIDI Output (MIDI OUT/THRU) OUT ❍ ❍ THRU ●If you are carrying out conversion using two cards, the copy-source card ●6.2 MIDI Note Map Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000) ●6.3 MIDI Note Out ❍ Valid for No. 001 through 500 ▲ Error when 501 or more are present ✕ Disabled (Always output when MIDI output is set to OUT) ●6.4 MIDI Channel ●6.5 Note Trigger Trigger Gate ❍ ❍ ❍ ●6.6 MIDI Rx Message Note On Velocity Panpot Expression ●6.7 MIDI Device ID (1–32) ●6.8 MMC Mode ●6.9 MTC ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled ●7.1 Baud Rate ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 8 AR-LINK settings ●8.1 AR-LINK Mode Action: Reduce the space used on the copy-source card, such as by deleting unneeded phrases. (What follows are errors that may occur when converting a card in AR-3000 format to AR-2000 format.) ▲When there are phrases recorded using recording settings that do not exist in AR-2000 format Phrases with the following recording settings cannot be used in AR2000 format. • Phrases for which the RDAC grade is S-HIGH • Phrases for which the RDAC mode is H-LINEAR or MODE3 Action 1: Carry out phrase-editing phrase convert (p. 72) to convert the phrase that caused the error to recording settings that can be used with AR-2000 format. ▲When there are phrases for which playback points have been set When there is a phrase for which playback point phrase information (p. 56) has been set, conversion stops. ◆ Channel Mode: OFF ◆ Channel Mode: ON ●9.2 Line Thru settings *1 <Line Thru:Thru Volume> AR-2000 System Version 1.03 or earlier OFF ◆ Line Input Select: OFF ◆ Line Input Select: ON ON: When 0% ◆ Line Input Select: ON ON: When 1%–100% <Line Thru:Thru Volume> AR-2000 System Version 1.10 or later OFF ❍ ◆ Line Input Select: Mute ON: When 0% ◆ Line Input Select: Mix ON: When 1%–100% ✕ Disabled Fade Out, Fade In ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled Action 1: Carry out phrase-editing phrase truncate. Action 2: Reset the playback points at both ends of the phrase (resulting in a state in which playback points are not set). Action 3: Make a backup on another card and delete the phrase. ▲When there is a pattern phrase to which an already-created pattern phrase is assigned. In the AR-2000 format, a pattern phrase to which a previously created pattern phrase is assigned cannot be used. Action 1: Re-create the pattern phrase so that previously created pattern phrases are not assigned. Action 2: Make a backup on another card and delete the pattern phrase. <Delay Time:Phrase Play:Repeat Play> AR-2000 System Version 1.03 or earlier All settings ✕ Disabled (Busy always output) <Delay Time:Phrase Play:Repeat Play> AR-2000 System Version 1.10 or later ON:ON:ON ❍ Busy Out: All ON ❍ Busy Out: Delay ON ON:ON:OFF ◆ Busy Out: All ON ON:OFF:ON ◆ Busy Out: Delay ON ON:OFF:OFF ❍ Busy Out: Repeat ON OFF:ON:ON ❍ Busy Out: All OFF OFF:ON:OFF ◆ Busy Out: Repeat ON OFF:OFF:ON ◆ Busy Out: All OFF OFF:OFF:OFF ●9.6 Display Sleep amount of space used after conversion may increase somewhat. Conversion may not be possible if space is used up or there is little remaining space, even if conversion uses the same card (for single-card conversion) or cards of the same capacity (for two-card conversion). Action 2: Make a backup on another card, then delete the phrase. ●9.1 Dual Mono Mode ●9.3 Equalizer ●9.4 Input Volume Thru ●9.5 Busy Out *2 ●When you convert a card in AR-2000 format to AR-3000 format, the ✕ Disabled 9 System settings OFF (STEREO) ON (Dual MONO) Action 2: Reduce the space used on the copy-source card, such as by deleting unneeded phrases. ❍ ✕ Disabled 7 RS-232C settings 4800 9600 19200 38400 Action 1: Use a card for the copy destination that has a greater amount of available space than that used on the card-source card. Applications Sync Source Sync Out MTC Type MTC Error Level ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled ✕ Disabled and the copy-destination card do not need to be of the same capacity, but card conversion is not possible unless the usable space on the destination card is larger than the used space on the source card. ✕ Disabled ▲When there are song phrases In the AR-2000 format, song phrases cannot be used. Action : Make a backup on another card and delete the song phrase. ▲When there is a phrase at 501 or higher In the AR-2000 format, only up to 500 phrases can be used. Action : Copy the phrases to 500 or less, or make a backup on another card and delete the phrase at 501 or higher. ▲When there is a phrase assigned at 501 or higher *1, *2 Please note that for *1 Line Thru settings and *2 Busy Out, playback results may differ according to the AR-2000 system version. To check the system version of the AR-2000 you're using, switch on the power while holding down the SELECT dial on the front panel. The version information appears on the upper portion of the screen. When a phrase with the following settings is assigned at 501 or higher, it cannot be used in the AR-2000 format. • Pattern Phrase • Direct Playback • Program Playback • MIDI Note Map Action : Redo the settings so that no phrases are assigned at 501 or higher. 81 Recording and Playing MIDI Data (MIDI Phrases) What Are MIDI Phrases? You can record and play back MIDI data with the AR-3000. Sets of MIDI data recorded using the AR are called “MIDI phrases.” During recording or recording standby, this automatically becomes MIDI THRU. MIDI phrases and audio phrases are both treated as phrases in the way. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 You can do things like taking MIDI data created on a MIDI sequencer and recording it as a MIDI phrase on the AR-3000, then send the played-back data to a sound source module or the like to make broadcast announcements. The AR-3000 saves MIDI data as Format 0 Standard MIDI Files (SMF). * Audio phrases and MIDI phrases cannot be recorded, nor can they be played back at the same time. * When recording MIDI phrases, the effective capacity of a card is related not only to the recording time, but also to the density of the MIDI data. Please be aware that when you record MIDI phrases, the possible recording time for any one card will vary depending on the amount of MIDI data that has been generated. Unit Settings Putting the Unit in Recording Standby Make the correct connections, then turn on the power switch. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Recording Standby 1. Insert a formatted card into one of the slots. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number you want to record. To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial. * You cannot change the phrase number after recording, so be sure to select the phrase number you want to record. Controlling the unit by using MIDI signals is described in another chapter. 3. Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button to go into recording standby. Refer to “Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)” (p. 105). fig.13-g01e Connecting Equipment fig.13-01e (MIDI Connections) During recording standby, the PLAY indicator and the PAUSE indicator flash in red. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer • If you try to re-record a phrase that’s already been recorded, a prompt message appears. If you choose “YES” and press the ENTER button, the recorded data for the phrase is deleted and the unit goes into recording standby. If you choose “NO,” the unit returns to the normal display. * Please be aware that data deleted here cannot be recovered, even if you cancel recording standby without recording anything. • When “Card Protect (p. 77)” is set to “ON,” recorded phrases are protected and recording is not possible (writing, overwriting, deleting, and editing card data is prohibited). MIDI IN MIDI Sound Module 82 Powered Speaker (for monitor) Recording and Playing MIDI Data Selecting the Recording Connector Starting and Ending Recording When you’re recording MIDI data, choose “MIDI-IN” as the recording connector. 1. Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button while in recording standby starts recording. Procedure for Selecting the Recording Connector During recording, the PLAY indicator lights up in red. 1. Put the unit into recording standby. 2. Start playback of the MIDI data. 3. Press the STOP button to end recording. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the REC-In , then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI-IN, then press the ENTER button. The screen like the one below appears. 4. ig.13-g02e * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. Setting the MIDI Time Base The MIDI time base determines the precision with which you can record notes, and differs from one equipment to another. (On some equipment, this is called “resolution.”) Set the time base for the AR-3000 to either 192 or 240, to match the time base of the connected MIDI device. • In MIDI recording on the AR-3000, the tempo when recorded is assumed to be 120. (Tempo information is not stored.) • You can’t change a phrase number later, so be sure to choose the phrase number you want to record to, and then record. * Recording cannot span two cards inserted in the slots. When the free space on one card is used up, recording ends automatically. When the time base of the connected MIDI device is: 24, 48, 96, 192, or 384 → Set the AR-3000 time base to 192 30, 60, 120, 240, or 480 → Set the AR-3000 time base to 240 Starting and Stopping Recording Through MIDI Playback 2. Turn the SELECT dial to select “Time Base,” then press the dial. With the AR-3000, you can start recording when a start message is received from another MIDI device, and stop recording when a stop message is received during recording. During recording standby, recording starts when a System Realtime start message (FAH) is received, and stops when a stop message (FCH) is received. * You can set the Time Base only when “MIDI-IN” has been selected as the recording connector. During playback, start (FAH), stop (FCH), and timing clock (F8H) messages are sent. Procedure for Setting the MIDI Time Base 1. Put the unit into recording standby. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Time Base (192 or 240), then press the ENTER button. * Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed. What Is a Timing Clock? This is MIDI information used when synchronizing a number of instruments using MIDI. The playback device sends clock messages at intervals that correspond to its own tempo, and the receiving device operates in accordance with those messages. MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p. 138 through p. 145 83 Applications • Next, if you’re setting the MIDI time base, go to step 2 of the procedure for setting the MIDI time base. • Some MIDI sequencers output the setup data for the MIDI sound module (data describing the tones for each part, the volume, effects, etc.) when the song is selected, and it may be impossible to record the MIDI information correctly when recording is started on the AR-3000 after song selection. Should this occur, first start recording on the AR-3000, and after that initiate song selection and the start of playback on the MIDI sequencer. Recording and Playing MIDI Data Playback of MIDI Phrases Playback Procedures Selection of MIDI Output (OUT/THRU) Manual Playback This changes the function of the MIDI output connector. Here, select OUT. OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the unit. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI signals from the unit are not output. Procedure for Setting MIDI Output 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Output (OUT), then press the dial. fig.13-g02e 1. Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to play. To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial. 3. • Press the PLAY button, and the phrase starts playing back. During playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator lights up in green. • Pressing the STOP button ends playback. • During playback, you can choose the next song to play (without stopping the phrase being played) by turning the SELECT dial. * Please be aware that you cannot pause a MIDI phrase. Playback by Control Input You can perform playback by control input and other means, just as you can for audio phrases. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the setting. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES”, then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Setting the Playback Tempo This sets the speed for playback of MIDI phrases in beats per minute (a tempo of from 5 to 260). The setting is made for individual phrases. * In MIDI recording on the AR-3000, the tempo when recorded is assumed to be 120. (Tempo information is not stored.) The setting for the MIDI playback tempo is made with a phrase setting. Refer to “Changing the Playback Tempo for MIDI Phrases (MIDI Playback Tempo)” (p. 60). 84 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device → p. 85 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input Terminals) You can control the unit from an external device by using the input terminals, among the screw-on control terminals on the unit’s rear panel. This chapter describes how to connect external equipment and make the settings on the AR-3000. operation. When making connections to the ports, be careful not to lose the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a physician. To confirm phrases when selecting a phrase, you can use the PLAY and STOP buttons to play and stop phrases, and the PAUSE button to pause phrases. Note that you cannot change settings during phrase playback. Types of Control Input Playback What Is No-voltage/Makecontact? The three playback methods yield the following nine types of operational specifications according to their settings. Choose the one that matches your usage conditions. The varieties of control input playback are direct playback (p. 86), program playback (p. 89), and binary playback (p. 92). This is a contact that makes starting possible simply by connecting two lines to the control input terminals and shorting their ends. This is a general-use method that lets you create start systems easily using only a switch and without any need for a power source, enabling easy use for a variety of applications. • Direct Playback (NORMAL) You can control recording and playback on the AR-3000 by on and off signals input from an external device through the no-voltage/make-contact or open collector circuit. • Binary Playback (Level: OFF; Edge: OFF) The range of situations where you can use the unit can be expanded by connecting infrared sensors, external-start connectors such as switches, relays, and timers, and the like to the unit. • Binary Playback (Level: ON; Edge: ON) • Direct Playback (LAST-IN) • Direct Playback (SEQUENCE) • Program Playback Applications The AR-3000 can help simplify installation operations by making the starting-side contact hot and sharing the ground as the common (COM) port. • Direct Playback (FIRST-IN) • Binary Playback (Level: ON; Edge: OFF) • Binary Playback (Level: OFF; Edge: ON) * Different types of playback cannot be carried out at the same time. Operational Specifications for Control Input Playback fig.14-01e When control signals When new control signals are input during playback of a phrase are input continuously Also refer to “Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR3000” (p. 18) for more examples of usage of the control input and output terminals. For information about the specifications of the control input and output terminals, refer to “Specifications of the Control Input/Output Terminals” (p. 136). Important Notes on Using the Control Input and Output Terminals Direct Play Normal When priority is high, quits and Repeated plays back the phrase specified later. No effect when priority is low or when the number is the same. First-In Disabled Repeated Last-In Quits and plays back the phrase specified later. Repeated Sequence Stored in memory (cued). After Played back once only phrase playback finishes, sequential start. Up to 100 can be cued. Program Play Disabled Playback in assigned sequence, repeated playback within the program. Exchange advances to the next program. Level: OFF Edge: OFF Disabled Played back once only Level: ON Edge: OFF Disabled Repeated Level: OFF Edge: ON Quits and plays back the phrase specified later. Played back once only Level: ON Edge: ON Quits and plays back the phrase specified later. Repeated * The control input and output terminals cannot be used to switch the power to the AR unit on or off. * The two common (COM) ports are connected internally, so you can achieve operation by making the connection to either one. At times such as when connecting more than one AR control port to a single make contact, interconnect one COM port from each AR. However, do not intermix this unit with other AR series devices. Doing so may result in unstable Binary Play 85 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Type of Control Input Recording There is one type of control input recording: Terminal Recording (p. 98). Operational Specifications for Direct Playback Basic Operation of Direct Playback fig.14-04e Assigning a Phrase to a Port and Playing It Back (Direct Playback) Port NO. 1 Port NO. 2 STOP Port A0002 A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT What Is Direct Playback?/Uses and Applications By inputting control signals directly to Port Nos. 1 through 16, you can play back the phrases assigned to the port numbers. You can play back up to 16 phrases. You need to assign the phrases you want to Port Nos. 1 through 16 ahead of time. This is handy when you want to directly specify the phrases you want using switches, relays, sensors, and the like. A0001 Interrupted Playback: Input a control signal to a port from 1 to 16. → This plays the phrase assigned to the port. Stop: Input a control signal to the Stop port. → This stops phrase playback. Also, Direct playback includes normal playback, First-In playback, Last-In playback, and sequence playback. fig.14-02e Choose the one that matches your usage conditions. Control signal 2 3 4 5 1 Port No. Phrase A0002 A0010 B0008 A0021 B0050 ... ... 16 Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input Playback” (p. 85). A0050 Normal Playback Connecting External Equipment Input made to a port having higher priority takes precedence, and will result in earlier playback. Ports Used for Direct Play Port No. 1 has the highest priority, with the priority decreasing as the port number increases. “1 through 16”: Inputting a control signal directly to the port having the number corresponding to the phrase starts playback of the phrase. “STOP”: This stops phrase playback. Set to "ON" by shorting the above-mentioned port and “COM (common).” Priority (High) Port No. 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 16 (Low) When a control signal is input to a high-priority port during phrase playback, playback of the current phrase is stopped, and playback of the specified phrase then begins. fig.14-05e Port NO. 1 fig.14-03e Phrase playback Port NO. 2 ..... A0002 A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT A0002 Interrupted No action results if a control signal is input to a low-priority port (or the same numbered port) during phrase playback. fig.14-06e ..... Disabled Port No.1 Common port Phrase playback Port No.2 Stop AUDIO OUTPUT Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 86 A0001 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously input. fig.14-12e Port No.1 fig.14-07e Port No.2 Port No.1 AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0001 A0001 First-In Playback A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT A0002 Even when control signals are input continuously, playback is conducted one time only and then ends. fig.14-13e The phrase played back earlier is given precedence in playback. During phrase playback, even when a new START signal is input, it is disregarded. Disabled Port No.1 AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 fig.14-08e Disabled AR-3000 Settings Disabled Port No.1 Port No.2 AUDIO OUTPUT A0002 Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously input. fig.14-09e AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0001 A0001 Last-In Playback The control signal that is input later is given precedence in playback. During phrase playback, when a different START signal is newly input, playback of the current phrase is stopped, and playback of the specified phrase begins. fig.14-10e Selecting the Control Input Mode Select “DIRECT PLAY” from the control input modes (DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/ TERMINAL REC). Port No.1 Port No.2 AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0002 * You cannot achieve control input playback merely by connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports. Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode A0001 Interrupted Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously input. 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. fig.14-11e 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input Mode,” then press the dial. Port No.1 AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0001 A0001 Sequence Playback When a new control signal is input during phrase playback, the new phrase is then stored (queued). 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “DIRECT PLAY,” then press the dial. fig.14-g01e When playback of the current phrase is finished, the subsequently specified phrase is played back. A maximum of 100 phrases can be stored (queued). 87 Applications Port No.1 If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose YES, then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 5. Press the MODE button. Assigning Phrases to the Ports This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. Assign phrases to control input Port Nos. 1 through 16. If not assigning a phrase to a port, select “-----.” * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the Direct Playback Method Select the Direct Playback Method (NORMAL/FIRST-IN/ LAST-IN/ SEQUENCE) to be used. While you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B, note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted when the phrase was registered is not inserted at the time of playback (if the phrase is not saved, the playback signal is disregarded). Settings When Formatting Cards(in Slot A) fig.14-14e 2 3 4 5 1 Port No. Phrase A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005 ... ... 16 A0016 “Operational Specifications for Direct Playback” → p. 86 Procedure for Setting the Direct Playback Method 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.2 Direct Playback,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Direct Playback system (NORMAL, FIRST-IN, LAST-IN, or SEQUENCE), then press the dial. fig.14-g02e By assigning “PLAY” instead of a phrase, you can obtain the same functions from that port as you do using the PLAY button on the front panel. <During Direct Playback> By inputting a control signal to the port to which “PLAY” is assigned, you can play back the phrase indicated in the display. This is convenient when you want to use an external device to start playback of phrases selected with the SELECT dial. You can also stop playback using the STOP port. <While in Phrase Record Standby> • If making the settings in “Assigning Phrases to the Ports,” proceed to Step 4 in the procedure for assigning the phrases. • To quit making settings, press the ENTER button. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. 88 When recording phrases, you can use the control input terminals to start and stop recording (for more on recording methods, please read “Recording Audio” (p. 40) as well). When in recording standby, if the port to which “PLAY” is assigned is set to “ON,” recording will begin. This is convenient when you want to start recording remotely, using an external device. You can also stop recording using the Stop port. * However, this method cannot be used for switching to recording standby, even when control signals are sent to both the port to which “PLAY” is assigned and the STOP port. Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Procedure for Assigning Phrases 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.2 Direct Playback,” then press the dial. 3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location (highlighted) to “No. 1.” 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the number of the control input port that is to be set, then press the dial. fig.14-g03e • Nos. 1-16: Port Nos. 1 through No. 16 • END: This quits making the settings. • RESET: Restores the settings at the time the card was formatted. • CLEAR: Erases all settings. fig.14-g04e • PLAY: Causes this connector to perform the same action as that resulting from pressing the PLAY button on the front panel. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Playing Back Phrases in the Order They Are Selected (Program Playback) What is Program Playback?/ Uses and Applications You can have the group of preset phrases play back in the order they are selected by inputting a control signal to the START port. With program playback, you can register up to a maximum of 100 phrases in each of the five patterns of Programs 1 through 5. Since the order and duration of the phrases is predetermined, this is a convenient option when you have only one contact, such as a timer or switch, with which to trigger this action. fig.14-15e Program 1 • -----: Selected when no phrase is set to the control input port. START signal Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to assign to the port, then press the dial. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign the rest of the phrases. START signal START signal START signal 7. To quit assigning phrases, turn the SELECT dial in step 4 to choose “END,” then press the dial. fig.14-g05e START signal START signal START signal No. 1 2 3 : 100 Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. EXCHANGE signal Phrase B0002 B0003 A0006 : B0088 : : : To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. 9. Press the MODE button. Phrase A0001 A0005 A0004 : A0100 Program 2 START signal 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. No. 1 2 3 : 100 Program 5 START signal START signal START signal START signal No. 1 2 3 : 100 Phrase A0020 B0010 A0021 : B0011 89 Applications 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to assign to the port, then press the dial. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Connecting External Equipment fig.14-17e START Port Ports Used in Program Playback “START”: Plays back phrases in the order set in program playback. STOP Port AUDIO OUTPUT “STOP”: This stops phrase playback. START Port “DEC” (Decrement): Goes back through the previous phrases in the program playback order. * If no settings are made for Programs 2 through 5, playback begins from the first phrase set in Program 1. Set to "ON" by shorting the above-mentioned port and “COM (common).” No. 002 No. 001 Interrupted “INC” (Increment): Advances through the program playback order. “EXCHANGE”: Advances through the cycle of the Programs 1 through 5 (1-2-3-4-5-1-2...). In this case, playback begins from the first phrase selected in the program to which you have switched. No. 001 AUDIO OUTPUT No.001 No.002 No.003 Playback: Input a control signal to the START port. → Phrases are played back in accord with the registered program playback order. Stop: Input a control signal to the STOP port. → This stops phrase playback. Advancing in the Playback Sequence: fig.14-16e Input a control signal to the INC (Increment) port. → This advances through the program playback order one phrase at a time. Going Through the Playback Sequence in Reverse Order: Common port Playback Stop Advance the phrase sequence by one Make the phrase sequence go back by one Advance the program sequence by one Input a control signal to the DEC (Decrement) port. → This causes the phrases to go back through the program playback order one phrase at a time. Advancing Through Programs 1 Through 5: Input a control signal to the EXCHANGE port. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 → This advances through Programs 1 Through 5 (1-2-3-4-5-12-...). Operational Specifications for Program Playback Playback begins from the first phrase selected in the program to which you have switched. When a one-shot control signal is input from a timer or similar device, a single registered phrase is played back. * If there is no registered phrase saved, the next registered phrase is played back. When consecutive signals are input, phrases are played back in succession in the order registered in the program. * If no settings are made in Programs 2 through 5, playback begins from the first phrase set in Program 1. During phrase playback, even when a new START signal is input, it is disregarded. fig.14-18e Disabled START Port AUDIO OUTPUT No. 001 If input of START signals continues when the end of the last phrase in Program 1 is reached, playback then continues with the first phrase in Program 1. To advance to Program 2, input a control signal to the “EXCHANGE” port. 90 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device AR-3000 Settings fig.14-19e START Port EXCHANGE Port Program 1 No. 001 AUDIO OUTPUT Program 2 No. 001 However, if no settings are made for Programs 2 through 5 when a control signal is input to the “EXCHANGE” port, playback continues after returning to the beginning in Program 1 (Reset operation). fig.14-20e (Count Playback 3) START Port EXCHANGE Port Program Play 1 No. 001 AUDIO OUTPUT Program Play 1 No. 001 Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input Playback” (p. 85). If due to a blackout or other cause the power to the A-3000 is cut during program playback, the program playback is reset when the power is restored. In such instances, input control signals to the INC, DEC, and EXCHANGE ports to restore the program playback order. Selecting the Control Input Mode Select “PROGRAM PLAY” from the control input modes (DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/ TERMINAL REC). * You cannot achieve control input playback merely by connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports. Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input Mode,” then press the dial. fig.14-21e START Port INC Port 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “PROGRAM PLAY,” then press the dial. DEC Port fig.14-g06e EXCHANGE Port No. 003 Program 1 No. 001 AUDIO OUTPUT No. 002 → No. 003 No. 003 Program 2 No. 001 Program 1 → Program 2 No. 004 → No. 003 Display Indications During Program Playback During program playback, the following appears in the display. fig.14-21ae Program Number Playback order Registered Phrase No. Remaining Time/Elapsed Time 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 91 Applications Important Note Regarding Power Outages and Similar Situations If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Registering Phrases 7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to store more phrases. Register the phrases in the program playback order. Up to a maximum of 100 phrases can be registered in each of the five patterns of Programs 1 through 5. 8. To cancel the save process, then in step 4, turn the SELECT dial to choose “END,” then press the dial. While you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B, note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted when the phrase was registered is not inserted at the time of playback (if the phrase is not saved, the next phrase is sought and then played back). Settings When Formatting Cards(in Slot A) fig.14-g09e 9. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. fig.14-22e Program 1 10. Press the MODE button. No. 1 2 3 : 100 This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. Phrase A0001 A0002 A0003 : A0100 Program 2–5: No setting has been supplied. Procedure for Registering Phrases 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.3 Program Playback,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Program No. where you want to make the setting (1 through 5), then press the dial. fig.14-g07e 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback sequence, then press the dial. • Nos. 001-100: Playback order • END: Finishes the setting process. • RESET: Restores the settings the card had when formatted. • CLEAR: Erases all settings. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Specifying Phrase Numbers in Binary Notation (Binary Playback) What is Binary Playback?/Uses and Applications In binary playback, phrases are selected by means of binary (Base 2) control signal input to the Port No. 1 through 11, with the selected phrases played back when control signals are input to the START port. You can select and play back up to a maximum of 2000 phrases. This allows all phrases to be specified with control signals (from a switch or other ON/OFF signal device) without the use of computers or other complicated equipment. fig.14-23e Binary Specification Port 1–11 fig.14-g08e 000001110000 START signal 6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. 92 Phrase A0112 Playback * To conduct binary playback, you will need to obtain a control device capable of generating binary signals. Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device * Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more than 50 milliseconds. Connecting External Equipment Operational Specifications of Binary Playback Basic Operation of Binary Playback fig.14-25e A0001 Terminals Used in Binary Playback “1-10”: Phrases are specified in binary format using combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON). “11”: 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are used to select Card A and Card B. Binary Specification Port 1–11 START Port A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT “START”: Plays back phrases. Playback: “STOP”: This stops phrase playback. Specify the phrases using combinations of signals to Port Nos. 1 through 10 and 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) of Port No. 11, and input a control signal to the “START” port. Set to "ON" by shorting the above-mentioned port and “COM (common).” fig.14-24e Card select → This plays back the specified phrase. Stop: Phrase select Input a control signal to the Stop port. ...... 12: not use → This stops phrase playback. four types of playback shown below. Set it to match your usage conditions. Common Port Playback Stop Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input Playback” (p. 85). Level: OFF, Edge: OFF fig.14-26e A0001 Even without connecting to all ten ports used for making the binary specifications, you can still conduct binary playback. The number of phrases that can be specified is determined by the formula “two to the nth power minus one” (with “n” being the number of connectors used). Example: Using three timers or other such devices capable of outputting the necessary signals gives two to the third power minus one (i.e., 8 - 1 = 7), meaning you can specify the seven phrases 001 through 007. However, if Port No. 11 is not connected, only “OFF” is enabled, leaving Card A as the only card that may be selected. Binary Specification Port 1–11 A0002 Disabled Disabled START Port AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0002 The binary-specified phrase is played back only once. Newly input START signals during playback of a phrase are disregarded. Even when START signals are input continuously, the phrase is played back only once and stopped. Since a phrase is played back by the instrument detecting the start when the port switches on from the off status, be sure to make the control signal to the START port OFF after playback of the phrase is finished. Start signals feature other special requirements. 93 Applications In addition, in binary playback you can use combinations of playback trigger (Level/Edge) ON and OFF to achieve the Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Level: ON, Edge: OFF phrases may be started by binary specification. fig.14-27e A0001 A0002 A0003 Binary Specification Port 1–11 Disabled START Port A0001 A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT A0003 A0002 When the Start port control signal is changed to OFF, playback tops after completion of the phrase currently being played. When a START signal is input again during playback of a phrase, the phrase currently being played back is stopped, and playback of the specified phrase begins. The binary-specified phrase is played back repeatedly. Phrases are played back repeatedly as long as the START signal is input continuously. With START signals being input continuously, playback of phrases may be started by binary specification. When the Start port control signal is changed to OFF, playback tops after completion of the phrase currently being played. Newly input START signals during playback of a phrase are disregarded. Level: OFF, Edge: ON fig.14-28e A0001 A0002 A0003 Binary Specification Port 1–11 AR-3000 Settings If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording, or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78). Disabled Selecting the Control Input Mode START Port A0001 AUDIO OUTPUT Select “BINARY PLAY” from the control input modes (DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/ TERMINAL REC). A0003 A0002 A0001 Interrupted The binary-specified phrase is played back only once. When a START signal is input again during playback of a phrase, the phrase currently being played back is stopped, and playback of the specified phrase begins. Even when START signals are input continuously, the phrase is played back only once and then stopped. Since a phrase is played back by the instrument detecting the start when the port switches on from the off status, be sure to make the control signal to the Start connector OFF after playback of the phrase is finished. * You cannot achieve control input playback merely by connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports. Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input Mode,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “BINARY PLAY,” then press the dial. Level: ON, Edge: ON fig.14-29e fig.14-g10e A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 Binary Specification Port 1–11 START Port AUDIO OUTPUT A0001 A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0003 Interrupted The binary-specified phrase is played back repeatedly. Phrases are played back repeatedly as long as the START signal is input continuously. With START signals being input continuously, playback of 94 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. To Specify Phrases With Binary Signals Example: Specifying Phrase A0015 (Card: A, Phrase #: 0015) 1. Convert the phrase number to a binary signal number. Playback Trigger Settings (Level/Edge) ”0” (OFF) Use combinations of playback trigger (Level/Edge) ON and OFF to achieve the four types of playback shown below. • Level: OFF; Edge: OFF • Level: ON; Edge: OFF • Level: OFF; Edge: ON • Level: ON; Edge: ON ”1” (ON) Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table (p. 96) The phrase number “0015” becomes the binary signal “0000001111.” 2. Select Card A or B with and ON or OFF control signal to Port No. 11. Card A: “0” (OFF) Procedure for Setting the Playback Triggers Card B: “1” (ON) 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.4 Binary Playback,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback trigger Level (OFF or ON), then press the ENTER button. * If there is no connection to Port No. 11, this is the same as “OFF,” and Card A is selected. With the above steps, Phrase No. A0015 is converted to: fig.14-30e Port No. → 1 Input signal → 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 6 0 Phrase No. (Binary) 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 Card fig.14-g11e 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback trigger Edge (OFF or ON), then press the dial. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. • Note that the direction of the phrase numbers (binary) and port numbers are reversed. • While you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B, note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted when the phrase was registered is not inserted at the time of playback (if the phrase is not saved, the playback signal is disregarded). • Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more than 50 milliseconds. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the 95 Applications Operational Specifications of Binary Playback → p. 93 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table fig.14-31e 96 Phrase No. Port No. 10987654321 Phrase No. Port No. 10987654321 Phrase No. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 0100 0000000001 0000000010 0000000011 0000000100 0000000101 0000000110 0000000111 0000001000 0000001001 0000001010 0000001011 0000001100 0000001101 0000001110 0000001111 0000010000 0000010001 0000010010 0000010011 0000010100 0000010101 0000010110 0000010111 0000011000 0000011001 0000011010 0000011011 0000011100 0000011101 0000011110 0000011111 0000100000 0000100001 0000100010 0000100011 0000100100 0000100101 0000100110 0000100111 0000101000 0000101001 0000101010 0000101011 0000101100 0000101101 0000101110 0000101111 0000110000 0000110001 0000110010 0000110011 0000110100 0000110101 0000110110 0000110111 0000111000 0000111001 0000111010 0000111011 0000111100 0000111101 0000111110 0000111111 0001000000 0001000001 0001000010 0001000011 0001000100 0001000101 0001000110 0001000111 0001001000 0001001001 0001001010 0001001011 0001001100 0001001101 0001001110 0001001111 0001010000 0001010001 0001010010 0001010011 0001010100 0001010101 0001010110 0001010111 0001011000 0001011001 0001011010 0001011011 0001011100 0001011101 0001011110 0001011111 0001100000 0001100001 0001100010 0001100011 0001100100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 0200 0001100101 0001100110 0001100111 0001101000 0001101001 0001101010 0001101011 0001101100 0001101101 0001101110 0001101111 0001110000 0001110001 0001110010 0001110011 0001110100 0001110101 0001110110 0001110111 0001111000 0001111001 0001111010 0001111011 0001111100 0001111101 0001111110 0001111111 0010000000 0010000001 0010000010 0010000011 0010000100 0010000101 0010000110 0010000111 0010001000 0010001001 0010001010 0010001011 0010001100 0010001101 0010001110 0010001111 0010010000 0010010001 0010010010 0010010011 0010010100 0010010101 0010010110 0010010111 0010011000 0010011001 0010011010 0010011011 0010011100 0010011101 0010011110 0010011111 0010100000 0010100001 0010100010 0010100011 0010100100 0010100101 0010100110 0010100111 0010101000 0010101001 0010101010 0010101011 0010101100 0010101101 0010101110 0010101111 0010110000 0010110001 0010110010 0010110011 0010110100 0010110101 0010110110 0010110111 0010111000 0010111001 0010111010 0010111011 0010111100 0010111101 0010111110 0010111111 0011000000 0011000001 0011000010 0011000011 0011000100 0011000101 0011000110 0011000111 0011001000 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 0227 0228 0229 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 0245 0246 0247 0248 0249 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0259 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 0285 0286 0287 0288 0289 0290 0291 0292 0293 0294 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 0300 Port No. 10987654321 0011001001 0011001010 0011001011 0011001100 0011001101 0011001110 0011001111 0011010000 0011010001 0011010010 0011010011 0011010100 0011010101 0011010110 0011010111 0011011000 0011011001 0011011010 0011011011 0011011100 0011011101 0011011110 0011011111 0011100000 0011100001 0011100010 0011100011 0011100100 0011100101 0011100110 0011100111 0011101000 0011101001 0011101010 0011101011 0011101100 0011101101 0011101110 0011101111 0011110000 0011110001 0011110010 0011110011 0011110100 0011110101 0011110110 0011110111 0011111000 0011111001 0011111010 0011111011 0011111100 0011111101 0011111110 0011111111 0100000000 0100000001 0100000010 0100000011 0100000100 0100000101 0100000110 0100000111 0100001000 0100001001 0100001010 0100001011 0100001100 0100001101 0100001110 0100001111 0100010000 0100010001 0100010010 0100010011 0100010100 0100010101 0100010110 0100010111 0100011000 0100011001 0100011010 0100011011 0100011100 0100011101 0100011110 0100011111 0100100000 0100100001 0100100010 0100100011 0100100100 0100100101 0100100110 0100100111 0100101000 0100101001 0100101010 0100101011 0100101100 Phrase No. Port No. 10987654321 Phrase No. 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 0335 0336 0337 0338 0339 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 0365 0366 0367 0368 0369 0370 0371 0372 0373 0374 0375 0376 0377 0378 0379 0380 0381 0382 0383 0384 0385 0386 0387 0388 0389 0390 0391 0392 0393 0394 0395 0396 0397 0398 0399 0400 0100101101 0100101110 0100101111 0100110000 0100110001 0100110010 0100110011 0100110100 0100110101 0100110110 0100110111 0100111000 0100111001 0100111010 0100111011 0100111100 0100111101 0100111110 0100111111 0101000000 0101000001 0101000010 0101000011 0101000100 0101000101 0101000110 0101000111 0101001000 0101001001 0101001010 0101001011 0101001100 0101001101 0101001110 0101001111 0101010000 0101010001 0101010010 0101010011 0101010100 0101010101 0101010110 0101010111 0101011000 0101011001 0101011010 0101011011 0101011100 0101011101 0101011110 0101011111 0101100000 0101100001 0101100010 0101100011 0101100100 0101100101 0101100110 0101100111 0101101000 0101101001 0101101010 0101101011 0101101100 0101101101 0101101110 0101101111 0101110000 0101110001 0101110010 0101110011 0101110100 0101110101 0101110110 0101110111 0101111000 0101111001 0101111010 0101111011 0101111100 0101111101 0101111110 0101111111 0110000000 0110000001 0110000010 0110000011 0110000100 0110000101 0110000110 0110000111 0110001000 0110001001 0110001010 0110001011 0110001100 0110001101 0110001110 0110001111 0110010000 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 0425 0426 0427 0428 0429 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 0438 0439 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 0465 0466 0467 0468 0469 0470 0471 0472 0473 0474 0475 0476 0477 0478 0479 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 0485 0486 0487 0488 0489 0490 0491 0492 0493 0494 0495 0496 0497 0498 0499 0500 Port No. 10987654321 0110010001 0110010010 0110010011 0110010100 0110010101 0110010110 0110010111 0110011000 0110011001 0110011010 0110011011 0110011100 0110011101 0110011110 0110011111 0110100000 0110100001 0110100010 0110100011 0110100100 0110100101 0110100110 0110100111 0110101000 0110101001 0110101010 0110101011 0110101100 0110101101 0110101110 0110101111 0110110000 0110110001 0110110010 0110110011 0110110100 0110110101 0110110110 0110110111 0110111000 0110111001 0110111010 0110111011 0110111100 0110111101 0110111110 0110111111 0111000000 0111000001 0111000010 0111000011 0111000100 0111000101 0111000110 0111000111 0111001000 0111001001 0111001010 0111001011 0111001100 0111001101 0111001110 0111001111 0111010000 0111010001 0111010010 0111010011 0111010100 0111010101 0111010110 0111010111 0111011000 0111011001 0111011010 0111011011 0111011100 0111011101 0111011110 0111011111 0111100000 0111100001 0111100010 0111100011 0111100100 0111100101 0111100110 0111100111 0111101000 0111101001 0111101010 0111101011 0111101100 0111101101 0111101110 0111101111 0111110000 0111110001 0111110010 0111110011 0111110100 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device fig.14-32e Port No. 10987654321 0111110101 0111110110 0111110111 0111111000 0111111001 0111111010 0111111011 0111111100 0111111101 0111111110 0111111111 1000000000 1000000001 1000000010 1000000011 1000000100 1000000101 1000000110 1000000111 1000001000 1000001001 1000001010 1000001011 1000001100 1000001101 1000001110 1000001111 1000010000 1000010001 1000010010 1000010011 1000010100 1000010101 1000010110 1000010111 1000011000 1000011001 1000011010 1000011011 1000011100 1000011101 1000011110 1000011111 1000100000 1000100001 1000100010 1000100011 1000100100 1000100101 1000100110 1000100111 1000101000 1000101001 1000101010 1000101011 1000101100 1000101101 1000101110 1000101111 1000110000 1000110001 1000110010 1000110011 1000110100 1000110101 1000110110 1000110111 1000111000 1000111001 1000111010 1000111011 1000111100 1000111101 1000111110 1000111111 1001000000 1001000001 1001000010 1001000011 1001000100 1001000101 1001000110 1001000111 1001001000 1001001001 1001001010 1001001011 1001001100 1001001101 1001001110 1001001111 1001010000 1001010001 1001010010 1001010011 1001010100 1001010101 1001010110 1001010111 1001011000 Phrase No. 0601 0602 0603 0604 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 0625 0626 0627 0628 0629 0630 0631 0632 0633 0634 0635 0636 0637 0638 0639 0640 0641 0642 0643 0644 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 0650 0651 0652 0653 0654 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 0665 0666 0667 0668 0669 0670 0671 0672 0673 0674 0675 0676 0677 0678 0679 0680 0681 0682 0683 0684 0685 0686 0687 0688 0689 0690 0691 0692 0693 0694 0695 0696 0697 0698 0699 0700 Port No. 10987654321 1001011001 1001011010 1001011011 1001011100 1001011101 1001011110 1001011111 1001100000 1001100001 1001100010 1001100011 1001100100 1001100101 1001100110 1001100111 1001101000 1001101001 1001101010 1001101011 1001101100 1001101101 1001101110 1001101111 1001110000 1001110001 1001110010 1001110011 1001110100 1001110101 1001110110 1001110111 1001111000 1001111001 1001111010 1001111011 1001111100 1001111101 1001111110 1001111111 1010000000 1010000001 1010000010 1010000011 1010000100 1010000101 1010000110 1010000111 1010001000 1010001001 1010001010 1010001011 1010001100 1010001101 1010001110 1010001111 1010010000 1010010001 1010010010 1010010011 1010010100 1010010101 1010010110 1010010111 1010011000 1010011001 1010011010 1010011011 1010011100 1010011101 1010011110 1010011111 1010100000 1010100001 1010100010 1010100011 1010100100 1010100101 1010100110 1010100111 1010101000 1010101001 1010101010 1010101011 1010101100 1010101101 1010101110 1010101111 1010110000 1010110001 1010110010 1010110011 1010110100 1010110101 1010110110 1010110111 1010111000 1010111001 1010111010 1010111011 1010111100 Phrase No. 0701 0702 0703 0704 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 0725 0726 0727 0728 0729 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 0735 0736 0737 0738 0739 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 0775 0776 0777 0778 0779 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 0785 0786 0787 0788 0789 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 0795 0796 0797 0798 0799 0800 Port No. 10987654321 Phrase No. Port No. 10987654321 1010111101 1010111110 1010111111 1011000000 1011000001 1011000010 1011000011 1011000100 1011000101 1011000110 1011000111 1011001000 1011001001 1011001010 1011001011 1011001100 1011001101 1011001110 1011001111 1011010000 1011010001 1011010010 1011010011 1011010100 1011010101 1011010110 1011010111 1011011000 1011011001 1011011010 1011011011 1011011100 1011011101 1011011110 1011011111 1011100000 1011100001 1011100010 1011100011 1011100100 1011100101 1011100110 1011100111 1011101000 1011101001 1011101010 1011101011 1011101100 1011101101 1011101110 1011101111 1011110000 1011110001 1011110010 1011110011 1011110100 1011110101 1011110110 1011110111 1011111000 1011111001 1011111010 1011111011 1011111100 1011111101 1011111110 1011111111 1100000000 1100000001 1100000010 1100000011 1100000100 1100000101 1100000110 1100000111 1100001000 1100001001 1100001010 1100001011 1100001100 1100001101 1100001110 1100001111 1100010000 1100010001 1100010010 1100010011 1100010100 1100010101 1100010110 1100010111 1100011000 1100011001 1100011010 1100011011 1100011100 1100011101 1100011110 1100011111 1100100000 0801 0802 0803 0804 0805 0806 0807 0808 0809 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 0820 0821 0822 0823 0824 0825 0826 0827 0828 0829 0830 0831 0832 0833 0834 0835 0836 0837 0838 0839 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 0845 0846 0847 0848 0849 0850 0851 0852 0853 0854 0855 0856 0857 0858 0859 0860 0861 0862 0863 0864 0865 0866 0867 0868 0869 0870 0871 0872 0873 0874 0875 0876 0877 0878 0879 0880 0881 0882 0883 0884 0885 0886 0887 0888 0889 0890 0891 0892 0893 0894 0895 0896 0897 0898 0899 0900 1100100001 1100100010 1100100011 1100100100 1100100101 1100100110 1100100111 1100101000 1100101001 1100101010 1100101011 1100101100 1100101101 1100101110 1100101111 1100110000 1100110001 1100110010 1100110011 1100110100 1100110101 1100110110 1100110111 1100111000 1100111001 1100111010 1100111011 1100111100 1100111101 1100111110 1100111111 1101000000 1101000001 1101000010 1101000011 1101000100 1101000101 1101000110 1101000111 1101001000 1101001001 1101001010 1101001011 1101001100 1101001101 1101001110 1101001111 1101010000 1101010001 1101010010 1101010011 1101010100 1101010101 1101010110 1101010111 1101011000 1101011001 1101011010 1101011011 1101011100 1101011101 1101011110 1101011111 1101100000 1101100001 1101100010 1101100011 1101100100 1101100101 1101100110 1101100111 1101101000 1101101001 1101101010 1101101011 1101101100 1101101101 1101101110 1101101111 1101110000 1101110001 1101110010 1101110011 1101110100 1101110101 1101110110 1101110111 1101111000 1101111001 1101111010 1101111011 1101111100 1101111101 1101111110 1101111111 1110000000 1110000001 1110000010 1110000011 1110000100 Phrase No. 0901 0902 0903 0904 0905 0906 0907 0908 0909 0910 0911 0912 0913 0914 0915 0916 0917 0918 0919 0920 0921 0922 0923 0924 0925 0926 0927 0928 0929 0930 0931 0932 0933 0934 0935 0936 0937 0938 0939 0940 0941 0942 0943 0944 0945 0946 0947 0948 0949 0950 0951 0952 0953 0954 0955 0956 0957 0958 0959 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 0965 0966 0967 0968 0969 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 0990 0991 0992 0993 0994 0995 0996 0997 0998 0999 1000 Port No. 10987654321 1110000101 1110000110 1110000111 1110001000 1110001001 1110001010 1110001011 1110001100 1110001101 1110001110 1110001111 1110010000 1110010001 1110010010 1110010011 1110010100 1110010101 1110010110 1110010111 1110011000 1110011001 1110011010 1110011011 1110011100 1110011101 1110011110 1110011111 1110100000 1110100001 1110100010 1110100011 1110100100 1110100101 1110100110 1110100111 1110101000 1110101001 1110101010 1110101011 1110101100 1110101101 1110101110 1110101111 1110110000 1110110001 1110110010 1110110011 1110110100 1110110101 1110110110 1110110111 1110111000 1110111001 1110111010 1110111011 1110111100 1110111101 1110111110 1110111111 1111000000 1111000001 1111000010 1111000011 1111000100 1111000101 1111000110 1111000111 1111001000 1111001001 1111001010 1111001011 1111001100 1111001101 1111001110 1111001111 1111010000 1111010001 1111010010 1111010011 1111010100 1111010101 1111010110 1111010111 1111011000 1111011001 1111011010 1111011011 1111011100 1111011101 1111011110 1111011111 1111100000 1111100001 1111100010 1111100011 1111100100 1111100101 1111100110 1111100111 1111101000 Applications Phrase No. 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517 0518 0519 0520 0521 0522 0523 0524 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 0540 0541 0542 0543 0544 0545 0546 0547 0548 0549 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0555 0556 0557 0558 0559 0560 0561 0562 0563 0564 0565 0566 0567 0568 0569 0570 0571 0572 0573 0574 0575 0576 0577 0578 0579 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 0585 0586 0587 0588 0589 0590 0591 0592 0593 0594 0595 0596 0597 0598 0599 0600 97 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Controlling Recording with the Control Terminals (Terminal Recording) fig.14-34e Card select Phrase select ...... 12: not use What is Terminal Recording/Uses and Applications You can specify phrases by inputting binary (base 2) signals to Port Nos. 1 through 11, and perform record, playback, and erase functions by inputting control signals to Port Nos. 13 and 14. All phrases can be specified with control signals (ON/OFF). This is convenient when you want to control recording from an external control device. Common Port Record/Playback/Erase Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 fig.14-33e Binary Specification Port 1–11 Operational Specifications for Terminal Recording 000001110000 Signal sent to Port Nos. 14 and 15 Phrase A0112 Record Playback Erase * To conduct binary playback, you will need to obtain a control device capable of generating binary signals. * Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more than 50 milliseconds. Connecting Equipment Ports Used in Terminal Recording “1-10”: Phrases are specified in binary format using combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON). “11”: 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are used to select Card A and Card B. “13, 14”: Record, erase, and playback are specified using combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON). Set to "ON" by shorting the above-mentioned port and “COM (common).” “CONT OUT”: Outputs signals for confirming the presence or absence of phrases. Phrases are specified by combinations of signals of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) to the Port Nos. 1 through 10 as well as Port No. 11, and record, playback, and erase functions are specified with combinations of control signals of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) to Port Nos. 13 and 14. Presence or Absence of Phrases If there is a binary-specified phrase that has already been recorded, a signal is output from the CONT OUT port. If there is no phrase, no signal is output. * During Terminal Recording, the CONT OUT port functions as a port for signals confirming the presence or absence of phrases. Note that this differs from the normal function of CONT OUT. fig.14-35e Timing Chart (The presence or absence of phrases) Binary Specification Port No.1–11 Tbcd Control Out (the presence or absence of phrases) min Tbcd : Binary Phrase Output Delay Times 98 - max 250 (msec) Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Recording Playback 13: 0 (OFF) 13: 1 (ON) 14: 1 (ON) 14: 0 (OFF) → While control signals are being input, the specified phrase is recorded. When input of the control signal stops, recording then ends. → The specified phrase is played back. Even when control signals are input continuously, the phrase is played back one time only and then ends. fig.14-36e fig.14-37e Timing Chart (PLAY) Timing Chart (Rec) Tbps Tbph Tbrs Tbrh Binary Specification Port No.1–11 Port No.14 Binary Specification Port No.1–11 Trw Tpw Port No.13 Tbrd Tbred Tbpd Busy Out Busy Out Tvred Tvrd Tvpd Tvbd AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT : Play Pulse Width : Binary Setup Time : Binary Hold Time : Busy Delay Time : Audio Delay Time : End Busy Delay Time : End Audio Delay Time min max 300 200 100 - 300 300 100 100 Tpw Tbps Tbph Tbpd Tvpd Tvbd : Play Pulse Width : Binary Setup Time : Binary Hold Time : Busy Delay Time : Audio Delay Time : End Busy Delay Time min max 20 200 100 - 300 300 100 (msec) (msec) * Recording does not start if there is a binary-specified phrase that has already been recorded (the recording instruction is disabled). When recording, either specify an empty phrase or delete the existing phrase before recording the new one. Additionally, in Terminal Recording, since a make signal is output from the CONT OUT port when a specified phrase has already been recorded, this allows confirmation using a connected external control device. * Playback does not begin if the binary-specified phrase is empty (the playback instruction is disabled). When playing back, specify a phrase that has already been recorded. 99 Applications Trw Tbrs Tbrh Tbrd Tvrd Tbred Tvred Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Erase Selecting the Control Input Mode 14: 1 (ON) Select “TERMINAL REC” from the control input modes (DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/ TERMINAL REC). 13: 1 (ON) → First, when ON is input to Port No. 14, and then ON is input to Port No. 13, erasure of the specified phrase begins. Erasure ends when the signal from the CONT OUT port (confirming the presence or absence of the phrase) changes to OFF. * Erasure does not begin if the binary-specified phrase is empty (the playback instruction is disabled). When erasing, specify a phrase that has already been recorded. fig.14-38e Tbds Port No.14 Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input Mode,” then press the dial. Timing Chart ( Delete) 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “TERMINAL REC,” then press the dial. Tpdd Binary Specification Port No.1–11 * You cannot achieve Terminal Recording merely by connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports. fig.14-g12e Trdw Tpds Tpdh Tprd Port No.13 Tbcd Tbdh To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Control Out (the presence or absence of phrases) Trdw Tpds Tpdh Tprd Tbds Tbdh Tbcd Tpdd 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. : Delete Rec Pulse Width : Delete Play Setup Time : Delete Play Hold Time : Delete Play Rec Delay Time : Delete Binary Setup Time : Delete Binary Hold Time : Binary Phrase Output Delay Time : Play Phrase Output Delay Time min max 100 50 50 0 200 20 - 250 2500 (typ.) (msec) * Tpdd: Play phrase output delay time is dependent on the card used. AR-3000 Settings If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-3000 can be used only for playback, and it is not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) during recording settings, recording or recording standby, or while making settings (except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-3000, follow the steps in “Card Convet” (p. 78). Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the Phrase Specification (BINARY 1/BINARY 2) Select the method (BINARY 1 or BINARY 2) used for specifying the phrase. BINARY 1: Binary specification normally used. Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table→ p. 96 BINARY 2: Method by which phrases are specified in sequence from Phrase 0001: Binary 0000000000. About Binary Specification When BINARY 2 is Selected → p. 101 100 Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device Procedure for Setting the Phrase Specification 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. With the above steps, Phrase No. A0015 is converted to: fig.14-39e Port No. → 1 Input signal → 1 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.5 Terminal Recording,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Phrase Select (BINARY 1 or BINARY 2), then press the dial. fig.14-g13e 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 6 0 7 0 Phrase No. (Binary) 8 0 9 0 10 0 Card • Note that the direction of the phrase numbers (binary) and port numbers are reversed. • Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more than 50 milliseconds. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. To Specify Phrases With Binary Signals Example: Specifying Phrase A0015 (Card: A, Phrase #: 0015) (* Phrase Specification: When BINARY 1 is Selected) 1. Convert the phrase number to a binary signal number. ”0” (OFF) ”1” (ON) About Binary Specification When BINARY 2 is Selected When phrases are selected with “BINARY 2,” Phrase 0001 changes to “0000000000” in the binary specification, with each subsequent specification shifted by one. fig.14-40e 0001 0000000000 Phrase No. 10987654321 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0000000001 0000000010 0000000011 0000000100 0000000101 0000000110 0000000111 0998 0999 1000 1111100110 1111100111 1111101000 . . . . . . . . . . Substituting the appropriate entries in “Phrase Number/ Binary Signal Correspondence Table” (p. 96) according to the above figure. Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table (p. 96) The phrase number “0015” becomes the binary signal “0000001111.” 2. Select Card A or B with and ON or OFF control signal to Port No. 11. Card A: “0” (OFF) Card B: “1” (ON) * If there is no connection to Port No. 11, this is the same as “OFF,” and Card A is selected. 101 Applications This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table → p. 96 Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 (Control Output Terminal) You can control an external device from the AR-3000 by using the output connectors among the screw-on control terminals on the unit’s rear panel. The AR-3000 outputs two types of control signals: BUSY OUT and CONTROL OUT. This chapter describes how to connect external equipment and make the settings on the AR-3000. To confirm phrases when making settings, you can use the PLAY/STOP button to play and stop phrases and the PAUSE button to pause phrases (audio phrases only), and the SELECT dial to move the playback location forward and backward (audio phrases only). Note that you cannot change settings during phrase playback. Also refer to “Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR3000” (p. 18) for more examples of usage of the control input and output terminals. For information about the specifications of the control input and output terminals, refer to “Specifications of the Control Input/Output Terminals” (p. 136). Important Notes on Using the Control Input and Output Terminals Starting Another Device (Busy Out) What Is a Busy Out Signal?/ Equipment Connections A Busy Out signal is a signal that is continuously output from the BUSY OUT port during playback (and during recording and recording standby) of audio phrases, MIDI phrases, pattern phrases, and song phrases. You can use this signal to start an amp or other external device in sync with phrase playback. The setting for whether or not the Busy Out signal is to be output is made separately respective to the following three situations: • During the delay time set in a phrase (p. 55): in Delay Time ON/OFF • During phrase playback: in Phrase Play ON/OFF • During the repeat interval set in a phrase (p. 57): in Repeat Int ON/OFF The setting is made on a system-wide basis (that is, it cannot be made separately for individual phrases). The Busy Out specifications are no-voltage/make-contact, with a contact capacity of a maximum of DC 30 V at 5 A. fig.15-01e (Busy Out Connection) * The control input and output terminals cannot be used to switch the power to the AR-3000 on or off. When making connections to the ports, be careful not to lose the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a physician. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Busy Out Signal Output During Playback of Pattern Phrases and Song Phrases Both pattern phrases and song phrases (p. 61, p. 64) are each handled as single phrases, so during playback the Busy Out signal is output without interruption. Busy Out Signal Output During Dual Mono Mode Playback During Dual Mono mode playback, the left-channel Busy Out signal is output from the CONT OUT port, and the rightchannel Busy Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT port. Dual Mono Mode → p. 119 102 Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 AR-3000 Settings The setting for the Busy Out signal is a system-wide setting (that is, it is not made separately for individual phrases). The setting for whether the Busy Out signal is output is made separately in the following three situations. Choose the one that matches your usage conditions. • In the delay time set in a phrase (p. 55): in Delay Time ON/OFF • During phrase playback: in Phrase Play ON/OFF • During the repeat interval set in a phrase (p. 57): in Repeat Int ON/OFF fig.15-02e (Busy Out) During Delay time During Repeat interval During Phrase playback AUDIO OUTPUT ON : ON : ON Make start fig.15-g01e 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Phrase Play (OFF or ON),” then press the dial. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Repeat Interval (OFF or ON),” then press the dial. 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. Close (ON) Open (OFF) Busy Out 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Delay Time (OFF or ON),” then press the dial. Make finish ON : OFF : ON ON : OFF : OFF OFF : ON : ON OFF : ON : OFF OFF : OFF : ON This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. OFF : OFF : OFF Delay Time Phrase Play Repeat Int Inserting into a phrase a delay time equal to the start time for the amp (the time until sound is played) can help prevent drop-out at the beginning of the phrase during playback. Procedure for Making the Setting for Busy Out Signal Output 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.5 Busy Out,” then press the dial. 103 Applications ON : ON : OFF 7. Press the MODE button. Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000 Controlling Another Device (Control Out) What Is a Control Out Signal?/ Equipment Connections The Control Out signal is a signal that is output from the CONT OUT port for one second after playback of audio phrases, MIDI phrases, pattern phrases, and song phrases. You can use it to control external equipment, using the timing at which phrase playback ends. You can set the time that is to pass after phrase playback before output is made to anything from 0 seconds to 59 minutes 59 seconds. The setting is made separately for individual phrases. The Control Out specifications are no-voltage/make-contact, with a make-contact time of 1 second and a contact capacity of a maximum of DC 30 V at 5 A. Please be aware that if you cancel phrase playback partway through, no Control Out signal is output. fig.15-03e (CONT OUT Connection) Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Control Out Signal Output During Playback of Pattern Phrases and Song Phrases Both pattern phrases and song phrases (p. 61, p. 64) are each handled as single phrases, so the Control Out signal is output after phrase playback ends. Control Out Signal Output During Dual Mono Mode Playback Note that no Control Out signal is output during Dual Mono mode playback (because the Control Out setting (p. 59) is not valid). At this time, if the Busy Out setting has been made, the leftchannel Busy Out signal is output from the CONT OUT port, and the right-channel Busy Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT port. 104 AR-3000 Settings The setting for the Control Out signal is made separately for individual phrases. When you make the Control Out setting, in addition to making the setting for whether the signal is output, you can also set the time until output after phrase playback (the offset time) to anything from 0 seconds to 59 minutes 59 seconds. fig.15-04e (Control Out) Offset time AUDIO OUTPUT Phrase Close (ON) Open (OFF) Control Out 1 sec Make start Make finish The setting for Control Out is made with Phrase Settings. Refer to “Control Out” (p. 59). During the offset time, when phrase playback ends due to the next playback instruction, operation will proceed according to the setting information for the phrase played back afterwards. Note that the settings for the first phrase are deactivated. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) What Is MIDI Control?/What You Can Do with MIDI Control MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” and is a unified worldwide standard allowing the exchange of performance information and the like between electronic instruments and computers. You can connect any device conforming to the MIDI standard with a MIDI cable, and then transmit performance data and control the device’s operation and settings. With the AR-3000, you can do things like those described below using MIDI signals. ● You can record and play back MIDI signals from an external MIDI device in the same manner as with audio phrases. For more about recording and playing back MIDI signals, refer to “Recording and Playing MIDI Data” (p. 82). ● You can use MMC and MTC signals from an external MIDI device for remote control and synchronized operation. • You can use received MMC signals to start and stop recording and playback of audio phrases (p. 110). What Is MMC?/Remote Control from Another Device → p. 110 • By using MMC and MTC signals in combination, you can synchronize playback of audio phrases to video equipment or the like. What Is MTC?/Synchronized Playback with Video Equipment and the Like → p. 112 Also see the “MIDI Implementation Chart” (p. 144), which allows easy confirmation of the MIDI messages that the unit can send and receive, and “MIDI Implementation” (p. 138), which gives detailed MIDI specifications. Note On: This is a message that provides information on when the keyboard of a MIDI instrument is fingered. Note On Velocity: This is a message that provides information on the force (velocity) used when pressing a key. Note Off: This is a message that provides information on when the keys of a MIDI instrument are released. Program Change: This is a message that provides information for switching sounds on an electronic instrument. On the AR-3000, this is used to switch phrase sets in groups of 100. Control Change: MIDI instrument performances use a variety of controllers, not just for the keyboard. The MIDI message that conveys such controller action is the Control Change. The AR-3000 receives and acts upon Panpot and Expression messages. Playback of Phrases Using MIDI Signals This plays back audio and MIDI phrases using MIDI signals from an external MIDI device as control signals. Phrase playback can be controlled by the different types of MIDI messages, including Note On/Off, Note On Velocity, Panpot, and Expression. * Note that simultaneous recording and simultaneous playback of audio phrases and MIDI phrases is not possible. In addition to these, you can use Exclusive (SysEx) messages to control starting and stopping for recording and playback (audio recording only), make settings for recording, and specify phrases. For more information, refer to MIDI Implementation (p. 138). Glossary of Selected MIDI Terms MIDI messages: These are messages conveyed by MIDI signals. These messages are necessary for playing performances on an external MIDI sound generating device. They include note messages for playing and stopping notes, as well as Control Change and System Exclusive (SysEx) messages, which can modify and enhance the expressive capabilities of performances. Note number: This is a number assigned to each key (note) 105 Applications ● You can use MIDI signals from an external MIDI device as control signals for controlling playback of audio and MIDI phrases. on the keyboard of an electronic musical instrument. Numbers are assigned in semitone steps, with middle C (C4) set at 60 and the numbers from 0 to 127 indicating the positions of the keys on the keyboard. On the AR-3000 these are used to specify phrases. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) Connecting External Equipment When Playing Back Audio Phrases Using MIDI Signals Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 AR-3000 Settings fig.16-01e (for MIDI Sequencer) Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) This changes the function of the MIDI output port. OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI signals from the unit are not output. Procedure for Setting MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) MIDI IN 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. Power Amp. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI output (OUT or THRU), then press the dial. fig.16-g01e When Playing Back MIDI Phrases Using MIDI Signals 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. fig.16-02e (for MIDI Sequencer) To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI Sound Module 106 * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that ifyou choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual s creen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) Note Number Phrase Assignments (MIDI Note Map) A Note On message causes the phrase with the corresponding note number to be played back. You can choose all phrases by changing the phrases sets in groups of 100 using Program Change messages. MIDI Note Map (Phrase Assignments from Program Changes and Note Numbers) fig.16-04e Program Change Note No. 1 C-1 – G9 You can assign 128 phrases however you like. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 A0001 – A0100 A0101 – A0200 A0201 – A0300 A0301 – A0400 A0401 – A0500 A0501 – A0600 A0601 – A0700 A0701 – A0800 A0801 – A0900 A0901 – A1000 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 B0001 – B0100 B0101 – B0200 B0201 – B0300 B0301 – B0400 B0401 – B0500 B0501 – B0600 B0601 – B0700 B0701 – B0800 B0801 – B0900 B0901 – B1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 C-1 – D#7 A0001 – A0100 A0101 – A0200 A0201 – A0300 A0301 – A0400 A0401 – A0500 B0001 – B0100 B0101 – B0200 B0201 – B0300 B0301 – B0400 B0401 – B0500 128 C-1 – G9 The phrase being plaued back is stopped. You can freely assign phrases to the Program Change 1 note numbers (128 numbers). Although you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B, note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted when the phrase was registered is not inserted at playback. (If the phrase is not saved, the playback signal is ignored). Settings When Formatting Cards (in Slot A) fig.16-03e Program Change1 Phrase C-1 C#-1 D-1 : G9 A0001 A0002 A0003 : A0128 Applications Note Number Phrase No. <Program Change 1> C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 G9 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 8 128 phrase all <Program Change 21–30, 71–80, 2–11> C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D#7 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 4 100 phrase all * The 1,000 phrases on card A are assigned to Program Changes 21 through 30, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. * The 1,000 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes 71 through 80, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. 107 Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) * For compatibility with the AR-2000 format, 500 phrases on card A and 500 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes 2 through 6, and 7 through 11, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. * With Program Change 128, playback of the phrase in progress is stopped by switching any note number on. Procedure for Making the MIDI Note Map Settings * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.2 MIDI Note Map,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the note number you want to set, then press the dial. fig.16-g02e MIDI Receive Channel (MIDI Channel) Setting This sets the MIDI receive channel. With MIDI, you can send different information to a number of MIDI instruments on a single MIDI cable. For example, when the MIDI channel for the sending device is set to “1,” then unless the MIDI channel of the receiving device (here, the AR-3000) is also set to “1,” the MIDI message is not transmitted. OFF: There is no phrase playback using MIDI signals. • C-1 through G9: Note number • End: To finish making settings. 1 through 16: MIDI signals are received and played back only on the selected channel. • Reset: This restores the settings at the time the card was formatted. ALL: Phrases are played back regardless of the MIDI channel. • Clear: This erases all settings. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. Procedure for Making the MIDI Receive Channel Settings 1. Press the MODE button. fig.16-g03e The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.4 MIDI Channel,” then press the dial. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to store, then press the dial. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign phrases. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Channel (OFF, 1 through 16, or ALL), then press the dial. fig.16-g05e 7. To cancel the save process, then in step 3, turn the SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial. fig.16-g04e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 9. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. 108 To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Handling of Note Off Signals (Note Trigger) This sets how Note Off signals are handled during phrase playback through MIDI. Expression (CC11): Change in master volume MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p. 138 through p. 145 Procedure for Making the Receive Message Setting 1. Press the MODE button. Trigger: Note Off signals are ignored. The MODE indicator lights up. Gate: Phrase playback stops when an off signal is received. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.6 MIDI RX Message,” then press the dial. When the trigger setting has been made, then with Program Change 128, playback of the phrase in progress is stopped by switching any note number on. Procedure for Making the Note Trigger Setting 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Note On Velocity (OFF or ON), then press the dial. fig.16-g07e 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Panpot (OFF or ON), then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Note Trigger (TRIGGER or GATE), then press the dial. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Expression (OFF or ON), then press the dial. fig.16-g06e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. MIDI Control Signals That the AR-3000 Can Receive (Receive Messages) The AR-3000 can receive the MIDI messages described below. 6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the setting, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 7. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Operation Procedures When you have finished making the settings, send MIDI signals from the external MIDI instrument. When messages are received, the unit starts playing back the phrases. Note On Velocity: Volume level when a phrase starts Panpot (CC10): Change in stereo position on the left and right channels 109 Applications 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.5 MIDI Note Trigger,” then press the dial. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) MIDI Note Out If MIDI Note Out is set to "ON," then when an audio phrase is played back, the MIDI Note Number On/Off signals set in the MIDI Note Map (p. 107) are output from the MIDI OUT connector. It's possible to use this signal to control a number of AR-3000 units. * If multiple note numbers are selected for the playback phrase, only the on or off signal for the lowest note number is output. Output is on the MIDI channel set with the MIDI receive channel (p. 108). If the MIDI receive channel is set to: • OFF: There is no output. • 1 through 16: Only the MIDI signals received on the selected channel are output. • ALL: Output is on channel 1. * When you are controlling a number of AR-3000 units using note Numbers, set the MIDI note trigger (p. 109) for the controlled AR-3000 to Trigger. * Even when MIDI phrases are played back, note number on/off signals are not output. Procedure for Making the MIDI Note Out Channel Settings setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 1 (MMC) What Is MMC?/Remote Control from Another Device What is MMC (MIDI Machine Control)? MMC refers to MIDI messages that were devised in accord with certain agreements as to how to facilitate the centralized control of a multiple number of recording devices using one device. In addition to playback, stopping, and fast forwarding of songs, you can also select tracks for recording and carry out other operations merely by operating the one device which functions as the master. Use of MMC signals requires that the other devices be capable of remote operation using MMC signals. The AR-3000 can work as a remote-control device, starting and stopping recording and playback of audio phrases when MMC signals are received from a hard-disk recorder or the like. 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.3 MIDI Note Out,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Note Output (ON or OFF), then press the dial. fig.16-g09e MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p. 138 through p. 145 Connecting External Equipment You can use the AR-3000 either as an MMC master or an MMC slave. In this connection example, the unit is used as a slave. fig.16-05e MIDI signal Audio signal 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. Harddisk Recorder To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the 110 MIDI OUT MMC signal MIDI IN Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) In situations such as when you carry out recording and editing with a hard-disk recorder and record the finished results on the AR-3000, you can control AR-3000 from the hard-disk recorder. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 AR-3000 Settings Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector. OUT: MIDI information from the AR-3000 is sent. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000 itself is not output. Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID) Settings This sets the MIDI device ID (from 1 through 32). When you are controlling the unit using MMC, you need to set both devices to matching device ID numbers. Check the device ID of the connected external MIDI instrument, then set the unit to the same device ID. * This was set to 1 when the unit was shipped from the factory. Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.7 MIDI Device ID,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Device ID (from 1 to 32), then press the dial. fig.16-g10e 1. Press the MODE button. Applications Procedure for Setting MIDI Output The MODE indicator lights up. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then press the dial. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Output (OUT or THRU), then press the dial. fig.16-g09e Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. MMC mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE) This selects master or slave for MMC synchronization. OFF: MMC information is not sent or received. MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the master of the external MIDI instrument. SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the slave of the external MIDI instrument. Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 111 Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.8 MMC Mode,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MMC Mode (OFF, MASTER, or SLAVE), then press the dial. fig.16-g11e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose ”NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. • If you are continuing by making the setting for “Sync Out,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting sync out (p. 117). To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Operation Procedures MMC Slave Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL or MTC) When you have finished making the settings, operate the connected master device. You can control the unit remotely. This sets the Sync Source. For MMC synchronization, set this to “INTERNAL.” MMC Master INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR3000’s internal clock. MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code information from the master device. Note that when Sync Source is set to MTC, there is no operation unless MTC information is input from the external MIDI instrument. Procedure for Setting the Sync Source 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to set Sync Source to “INTERNAL,” then press the dial. fig.16-g12e 112 When you have finished making the settings, operate the unit. You can control the connected slave device remotely. Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 2 (MMC and MTC) What Is MTC?/Synchronized Playback with Video Equipment and Other Devices What Is MTC (MIDI Time Code)? This comprises MIDI messages developed to allow MIDI devices to be synchronized with precision. It differs from MIDI Clock in that it displays the absolute time. The master device transmits the current absolute time (in hours/ minutes/seconds/frames from the start), and the time of the slave device is advanced to conform with it. Use of MMC signals requires that the other device is capable of synchronization using MTC. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) With the AR-3000, you can combine MMC and MTC signals to synchronize playback of audio phrases with a digital mixer, video equipment, or other devices. Types of MTC (Frame Rate) The MTC types (frame rates) you can select with the AR-3000 are shown below. When you are synchronizing operation using MTC, you need to set both devices to matching frame rates. Check the specifications of the connected external MIDI instrument, then make the settings. Synchronization by means of MTC is not possible when the Dual Mono mode on the AR-3000 is set to "ON." MTC synchronization may not be correct when Loop Play for a phrase is set to "ON." In such cases, use with Loop Play set to "OFF." 30: This is 30 frames per second, non-drop format. It is used for audio equipment such as analog tape recorders, and NTSC-format black and white video. Connecting External Equipment 29N: This is 29.97 frames per second, non-drop format. It is used for NTSC-format color video. In this connection example, the unit is used as a slave. You can the AR-3000 as an MTC master or as an MTC slave. fig.16-07e Control signal MIDI signal Audio signal 29D: This is 29.97 frames per second, drop format. It is used for NTSC-format color video for broadcast use. 25: This is 25 frames per second. It is used for SECAM- and PAL-format video and audio equipment, and for motion pictures. Monitor Video playback device Applications 24: This is 24 frames per second. It is used for video and audio equipment in the U.S.A., and for motion pictures. Video Time code Selection of MTC Type (30/29N/29D/25/24) → p. 115 Drop Frame and Non-drop Frame There are two types of time codes used by NTSC-format video-cassette recorders: drop frame, in which time codes are not continuous, and non-drop frame, in which time codes are continuous. To achieve compatibility with the NTSC color video standard, drop frame drops the first two frames of every minute except the 10th, 20th, 30th, 40th, and 50th minutes. Video MIDI Sync Interface MIDI OUT MTC, MMC signal MIDI IN Power Amp. fig.16-06e Non-Drop Frame(29N) 00m59s ... 01m00s 25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 05f ... Drop Frame(29D) 00m59s ... You can play back audio phrases in sync with video. Fast forwarding, rewinding, and playback from whatever position you want is also supported. 01m00s 25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 07f ... Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 Because continuous frames are easier to work with, non-drop frame is used in general video and music production. Conversely, drop frame is used in television stations and the like, where time codes must match actual clock times. 113 Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) AR-3000 Settings (When the AR3000 Is the Slave) Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector. OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000 itself is not output. Procedure for Setting MIDI Output 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to set MIDI Output to “THRU,” then press the dial. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.6 MIDI Device ID,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Device ID (from 1 to 32), then press the dial. fig.16-g14e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. fig.16-g13e * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID) Settings This sets the MIDI device ID (from 1 through 32). When you are controlling the unit using MMC and MTC, you need to set both devices to matching device ID numbers. Check the device ID of the connected external MIDI instrument, then set the unit to the same device ID. * This was set to 1 when the unit was shipped from the factory. 114 message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. MMC Mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE) This sets the MMC mode to “SLAVE.” OFF: MMC information is not sent or received. MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the master of the external MIDI instrument. SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the slave of the external MIDI instrument. Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.7 MMC Mode,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to set the MMC Mode to “SLAVE,” then press the dial. fig.16-g15e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL or MTC) 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the MTC Type (30/29N/29D/ 25/24) This selects the MTC type (frame rate). Check the specifications of the connected external MIDI instrument, then make the settings. This sets the Sync Source to “MTC.” Types of MTC (Frame Rates) → p. 113 INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR3000’s internal clock. Select this to make the unit the master. Procedure for Setting the MTC Type 1. Press the MODE button. Note that when Sync Source is set to MTC, there is no operation unless MTC information is input from the external MIDI instrument. 3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location (highlighted) to “MTC Type.” Procedure for Setting the Sync Source The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24), then press the dial. fig.16-g17e 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Sync Source to “MTC,” then press the dial. • If you are continuing by making the setting for “MTC Error Level,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting the MTC Error Level (p. 116). To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button. fig.16-g16e 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. • If you are continuing by making the setting for “Sync Out,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting Sync Out (p. 117). To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button. 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. 115 Applications MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code information from the master device. Select this to make the unit the slave. Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the MTC Error Level (0 to 10) This sets the interval at which the MTC reception status is checked (from 0 to 10). When you are conducting synchronization with the unit as the slave, this constantly checks whether the unit is correctly sending MIDI time codes. When MIDI time codes are not sent continuously, it is determined that there is a problem with MTC synchronization, and synchronized operation stops. The MTC error level sets the reference standard for this determination. Larger values increase the degree of error tolerance, making slave playback possible even when there are minor problems in receiving MIDI time codes. setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Operation Procedures When you have finished making the settings, carry out playback on the connected master device. Phrase playback in sync with received MIDI time codes starts. When Sync Source is set to MTC, the indicators on the front panel of the unit light up as shown below. fig.16-08e During Pause PLAY button PAUSE button Lights in green Lights in orange During Rec standby Lights in red Lights in orange A screen like the following appears during playback. fig.16-08ae Remaining time for phrase playback * This was set to 5 when the unit was shipped from the factory. Procedure for Setting the MTC Error Level MIDI Time Code 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the dial. 3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location (highlighted) to “MTC Error Level.” 4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MTC Error Level (from 0 to 10), then press the dial. fig.16-g18e Note that there is no operation unless MIDI time codes are input from the external MIDI instrument. AR-3000 Settings (When the AR3000 Is the Master) Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector. Here, select “OUT.” 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 6. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the 116 OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases, send Exclusive (SysEx) messages, or make the AR-3000 the master during synchronization using MIDI signals. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000 itself is not output. Procedure for Setting MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU) For setting procedure, refer to p. 111. Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID) Settings This sets the MIDI device ID (from 1 through 32). When you Controlling the AR-3000 Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control) are controlling an external MIDI instrument using MMC and MTC, you need to set both devices to matching device ID numbers. Check the device ID of the connected external MIDI instrument, then set the unit to the same device ID. * This was set to 1 when the unit was shipped from the factory. 3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location (highlighted) to “Sync Out.” 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set Sync Out to “MTC,” then press the dial. fig.16-g23e Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID For setting procedure, refer to p. 114. MMC mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE) This sets the MMC Mode to “MASTER.” OFF: MMC information is not sent or received. • If you are continuing by making the setting for “MTC Type,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting the MTC Type (p. 115). To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button. MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the master of the external MIDI instrument. 5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the slave of the external MIDI instrument. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. For setting procedure, refer to p. 111. This sets the Sync Source to “INTERNAL.” INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR3000’s internal time control. Select this to make the unit the master. MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code information from the master device. Select this to make the unit the slave. Note that when Sync Source is set to “MTC,” there is no operation unless MTC information is input from the external MIDI instrument. Procedure for Setting the Sync Source For setting procedure, refer to p. 112. Selecting Sync Out (OFF or MTC) This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Selecting the MTC Type (30/29N/29D/ 25/24) This selects the MTC type (frame rate). Check the specifications of the connected external MIDI instrument, then make the settings. Types of MTC (Frame Rates) → p. 113 This sets Sync Out to “MTC.” OFF: MIDI time codes are not sent. Procedure for Setting the MTC Type MTC: MIDI time codes are sent. Select this when you are operating a slave device using the unit's MTC. For setting procedure, refer to p. 115. Procedure for Setting Sync Out 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the dial. Operation Procedures When you have finished making the settings, play back a phrase on the unit. The connected slave device carries out synchronized playback. 117 Applications Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL or MTC) 6. Press the MODE button. Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C Connector What’s the RS-232C Connector?/ What You Can Do with the RS232C Connector The RS-232C connector is a connector used to connect to a computer or other peripheral equipment. The AR-3000 is equipped with a D-sub 9-pin type RS-232C connector. With the AR-3000, you can control the AR-3000 from an external control device such as a computer or touch panel by means of an RS-232C cable connection. standards. Make this setting as necessary when using a legacy model by means of card conversion. Procedure for Setting the Baud Rate 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “7.1 Baud Rate,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Baud Rate (4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400), then press the dial. fig.17-g01e For more information about examples of using the RS-232C connector, also see “Using the RS-232C Connector” (p. 20). ● Controlling the AR-3000 Using a Computer You can do things like controlling starting and stopping of recording or playback (for audio recording only), make settings during recording, specify phrases, and copy and delete phrases and cards. For more about the specifications of the RS-232C connector, see “RS-232C Connector Specifications” in Appendices (p. 136). Connecting Equipment 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the setting. To quit, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. fig.17-01e (RS-232C Connection) RS-232C connector of Personal computer RS-232C cable Available Documentation for the RS-232C In addition to the owner’s manual, “RS-232C Reference Notes” are available for purchase as reference materials that cover RS-232C connector control. To purchase these, contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized dealer. Turning the Power On and Off → p. 23 ● The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics: • Setup Baud Rate Setting Set the RS-232C communication speed (baud rate). The available baud rates are 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps. Choose one that matches the usage conditions. * Be sure to check the baud rate of the computer you’re using before making the setting. * The setting for 38,400 bps is for compatibility with legacy models (the AR-2000/1). However, it is a value for the communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C 118 • Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands • Examples of usage algorithms Playing Two Units’s Worth of Data on the Left and Right (Dual Mono Mode) What Is the Dual Mono Mode?/ Equipment Connections The Dual Mono mode is a feature for playing different mono audio phrases independently on the left and right channels. By playing odd-numbered phrases (A0001, A0003,... or B0001, B0003,...) from the left channel and even-numbered phrases (A0002, A0004,... or B0002, B0004,...) from the right channel, you can play back two units’s worth of data on a single unit. You can also play back separate phrases on the left and right channels either simultaneously, or shifted. fig.18-01e (What Is the Mono Mode?) If a phrase unsuited to Dual Mono playback is specified on either the left or right channel in the course of sequential phrase playback, it results in incorrect Dual Mono playback. To ensure reliable Dual Mono playback, specify the playback phrases with care. Dual Mono playback can be made possible by converting stereo phrases to mono phrases. You can also make Dual Mono playback possible for phrases having different RDACmodes by converting them after recording to make them uniform. For more about how to convert phrases, refer to “Phrase Convet” (p. 78). A0001 A0003 B0001 A0002 A0004 B0002 ● 1.5 Loop Play R Note that the Dual Mono mode is subject to various conditions that you should be aware of before you use the mode. Control Output During Dual Mono Mode Playback During Dual Mono mode playback, the left-channel Busy Out signal is output from the CONT OUT control port, and the right-channel Busy Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT control port. * Note that no Control Out signal is output (because the Control Out setting (p. 59) is not valid). On the AR-2000/100 (legacy models), this Dual Mono mode is named the “Channel Playback mode.” As you use it, keep in mind that it is the same feature. AR-3000 Settings Conditions for Simultaneous Playback in Dual Mono Mode Procedure for Setting the Dual Mono Mode ● Phrases Whose Recording Type Is Mono 1. Press the MODE button. ● RDAC-Grade and RDAC-Mode Must Be Uniform The MODE indicator lights up. Specifying Phrases Like the Following Result in Dual Mono Mode Playback That May Not Be Correct ● MIDI Phrases, Song Phrases → These are treated as empty phrases. Set the Dual Mono Mode to “ON (MONO 2ch).” 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.1 Dual Mono Mode,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Dual Mono Mode (ON (MONO 2ch)), then press the dial. fig.18-g01e ● Pattern Phrases Containing MIDI Phrases → These are treated as empty phrases, and the unit searches for and plays back the next phrase. ● Phrases Whose Recording Type Is Stereo 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. → Dual Mono playback is canceled, and the specified phrase is output in stereo (L/R). To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. ● Phrases for Which RDAC-Grade and RDAC-Mode Are Different When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. → The phrase already being played back is stopped, and the next specified phrase is played. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual 119 Applications Even-numbered phrases ・・・ L Odd-numbered phrases ・・・ The following phrase information has no effect during playback. Playing Two Units's Worth of Data on the Left and Right During Direct Playback screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. Operation Procedures Dual Mono Playback Through Manual Operation You can perform manual playback, in the same way as for ordinary stereo playback. 1. Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to play. Odd-numbered phrases are output by direct playback from output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output by direct playback from output R (right). The order of priority of the control input connectors may vary depending on how phrases are assigned to the control input terminals. To facilitate understanding, the explanations in this section assume that the assigned phrase numbers correspond to the port numbers. fig.18-02e (Monaural and Direct Charts) Port No. Phrase Output jack 1 2 3 4 5 A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005 L R L R L ... ... ... 16 A0016 R When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops simultaneously for the L and R channels. * Input a trigger signal to the control signal. * Do not simultaneously input more than one control input allocated to the same output. ●Normal Playback fig.18-g01e L ch Example 1 fig.18-03e (Ordinary Playback Example 1) Ignored R ch Port 1 * To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial. * To switch between L (left) and R (right), press the ENTER button. Port 2 Port 3 Output L 3. Output R A0001 A0002 • Pressing the PLAY button plays back a phrase. During playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator lights up in green. • Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L, depending on the port priority, signals input to 3 are not valid. * The phrase whose phrase number is highlighted is played back. • Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002 is played back even during playback of A0001. • Pressing the STOP button ends playback. • During playback, you can choose the next song to play (without stopping the phrase being played) by turning the SELECT dial. Example 2 fig.18-04e (Ordinary Playback Example 2) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Please be aware that you cannot pause Dual Mono playback. Dual Mono Playback Through Control Input You can perform playback through control input, in the same way as for ordinary stereo playback. The settings for control-input playback basically act independently for each channel. For more information about the operation of playback with control input terminals, see also “Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device (Control Input)” (p. 85). 120 Output L Output R A0003 A0001 A0002 A0003 Interrupted • Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L, depending on the port priority, playback of A0003 is halted and A0001 is played. • Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002 continues to be played back even during playback of A0003 or A0001. Playing Two Units's Worth of Data on the Left and Right ● Last-In Playback Port 1 When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops simultaneously for the L and R channels. Port 2 ● When Level is set to “ON” and Edge is set to “OFF” Binary Signal Port 1〜11 Port 3 A0001 Output L A0001 A0002 A0003 Ignored A0003 START port A0002 Output R A0001 Interrupted A0001 Output L • Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L, depending on the port priority, playback of A0001 is halted and A0003 is played back. • Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002 continues to be played back even during playback of A0003 or A0001. ● Sequence Playback A0002 Output R • Any new Start signal input during A0002 playback is not valid. • Playback is repeated while binary is specified for A0003 and the Start signal is continuously input. ● When Level is set to “OFF” and Edge is set to “ON” Binary Signal Port 1〜11 Port 1 A0003 A0003 A0001 A0002 Ignored Port 2 START port Port 3 Output L A0001 Port 4 A0002 Port 5 • A0001 is played back only once. Output L Output R A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005 A0005 A0005 : Stereo phrase A0004 Interrupted • The control signals for port Nos. 3 and 4 are stored in memory (reserved), and after playback of A0001 and A0002 ends, A0003 and A0004 are played. • Because A0005 is a stereo phrase, playback of A0004 is stopped, and the specified phrase is played back in stereo (left and right). During Program Playback Odd-numbered phrases are output by program playback from output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output by program playback from output R (right). * Because Start signals are ignored during playback of one phrase, simultaneous playback of output L and R is not possible. When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops simultaneously for the L and R channels. START port Output L A0003 A0001 Output R A0002 During Binary Playback Odd-numbered phrases are output by binary playback from output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output by binary playback from output R (right). • A0002 is played back only once, then ends, even when binary is specified for A0002 and the Start signal is continuously input. Dual Mono Playback Through MIDI Signals You can perform playback through MIDI signals, in the same way as for ordinary stereo playback. Playback starts when a MIDI Note On message is received. Odd-numbered phrases are played back from the L (left) channel, and evennumbered phrases are played back from the R (right) channel. * Because playback is performed in reverse priority, the lastreceive Note On message takes priority. * Setting Note Trigger to “Gate” makes it possible to send stop instructions independently to the left and right channels. Dual Mono Playback Through the RS232C Connector In a manner similar to ordinary stereo playback, you can also obtain playback through the RS-232C connector. Phrase playback-sequence information is allocated to the corresponding dedicated buffer according to whether the phrase number is odd or even, and playback on the left and right channels starts simultaneously according to the respective playback sequence. * There are no commands for Dual Mono playback. * Sending a playback-stop instruction stops playback simultaneously on the left and right channels. 121 Applications Output R Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units (AR-LINK) What Is AR-LINK?/What You Can Do Using AR-LINK The AR-LINK connector is a special transmission connector for AR units, used for creating completely synchronized recording and playback with multiple AR-3000 devices. The connectors feature special leads for commands and master clock, allowing synchronization with sampling frequency precision. ● Use MIDI to send signals from a video device to the master AR-3000. You can chain 31 slave AR units to synchronize images and phrases. fig.19-02e MIDI signal AUDIO signal Video playback device With one AR-3000 as the master, you can link up to 31 other AR-3000 or AR-200 units (for a total of 32 devices) to get 64channel multitrack recording and playback. MMC Mode: MASTER MTC Sync Source: INTERNAL MTC Sync Out: MTC However, this system allow recording and playback only of audio phrases (Song phrases, Pattern phrases, and MIDI phrases cannot be handled). MIDI OUT MTC, MMC signal Power Amp. Synchronized Audio Phrase Playback with AR-LINK Signals Example of Connecting to an External Device MIDI IN AR-LINK Master MMC Mode: SLAVE MTC Sync Source: MTC AR-LINK Slave ● Use MIDI to send a hard disk recorder’s operation data to the master AR-3000. Connecting four slave AR units in a chain then allows you to get 8-channel multitrack recording. fig.19-01e Up to 31 AR-3000/200s (for a total of 32) can be linked. MIDI signal Audio signal Harddisk Recorder AR-LINK Slave MIDI OUT Audio patch bay MTC, MMC signal MIDI IN Also refer to “Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 2 (MMC and MTC)” (p. 112). LINE IN AR-LINK Master Do not connect a cable to AR-LINK IN on the AR-3000 set as the master. LINE IN AR-LINK Slave LINE IN When an AR-200 is serving as a slave, AR-LINK synchronization cannot be accomplished if the master chooses a B slot phrase. LINE IN AR-LINK Slave 122 During AR-LINK playback, the "Repeat Play," "Loop Play," and "Control Out" settings made for the phrases have no Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units effect. procedure (p. 41) and recording settings (p. 42). The slave AR units operate according to the operation of the master. Unit Settings fig.19-g03e Setting the AR-LINK Mode OFF: There is no synchronization using AR-LINK. Even when this is set to Off, signals input to AR-LINK IN are output from AR-LINK OUT. REC Standby (Slave) During recording (Slave) MASTER: This enables operation as the AR-LINK master. * When you set the master, all slave AR units connected by ARLINK are set to the same value. SLAVE: This enables operation as the AR-LINK slave. Use this settings for the second and later AR units connected using AR-LINK. * During recording, you can stop the slave AR units individually, by operating their respective panels. Procedure for Setting the AR-LINK Mode Playback Procedure 1. Press the MODE button. For the master, this is the same as the usual playing back procedure. The slave AR units operate according to the operation of the master. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “8.1 AR-LINK Mode,” then press the dial. fig.19-g02e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re returned to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded. During playback (Master) Applications 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the AR-LINK Mode (OFF, MASTER, or SLAVE), then press the dial. fig.19-g04e * During playback, you can stop the slave AR units individually, by operating their respective panels. * During AR-LINK playback, you cannot switch to the remaining-time display. * If independent playback is carried out on the slave AR-3000, the indication for the fact that it is an AR-LINK slave disappears. Phrases used for synchronized AR-LINK playback must all be the same Card Slot, REC Type, RDAC-Grade, and RDACMode. If a card having a different setting than the master is inserted into an AR unit, the AR unit will not operate. In such instances, connected slave AR units thereafter are not affected. Please be aware that a second or subsequent AR unit connected through AR-LINK cannot be set as the master. AR-LINK Master AR-LINK signals are not sent from the master in cases like the ones below. AR-LINK Slave • When the Dual Mono mode is "ON" • When the master is playing back a MIDI phrase, song phrase, or pattern phrase Recording Procedure For the master, these are the same as the usual recording 123 Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback This section highlights some other functions that can be useful when you play phrases. Use them to match the situation. Line Thru Output Specifications The following output specifications apply, depending on the Line Thru settings. fig.20-02e (Line Thru Specifications) Line Out (Thru) Setting During Phrase Playback AR PHRASE OUTPUT Handy Uses of Line Thru When On (0%) With the AR-3000, you can take audio from LINE IN, mix it during phrase playback, and mixed it from Line Out (or Line Thru). When On (50%) During Phrase Playback During Phrase Playback When On When On (100%) Sound input to LINE IN fig.20-01e (Line Thru Connection) CD player or other sound playback device LINE THRU ●When fade-out or fade-in settings have been made AR PHRASE OUTPUT During Phrase Playback During Phrase Playback When On (0%) LINE IN (ANALOG) LINE THRU BALANCED OUTPUT Fade-Out (TIME) Sound input to LINE IN + AR sound phrase Power Amp. Fade-In (TIME) When Using Microphone Input Audio from the Mic jack is sent to Line Out only during recording or recording standby. This is useful when you want to do things like taking music from LINE IN and layering it with narration phrases as background music. You can also make the LINE IN sound fade out or in. You cannot output audio from the Mic jack during phrase playback or while stopped, even when “ON” is selected for Line Thru. Line Thru Settings Make the settings for Line Thru. Line throughput is possible only for signals connected to the LINE IN jacks (the DIGITAL IN jack cannot be used for this). Also refer to “Line Thru Output Specifications.” • Volume: Set the Line Thru output volume level during phrase playback within the range of 0 to 100%. The throughput volume level output when phrase playback is stopped is 100%. When you set the volume level to 0%, nothing is output to Line Thru during phrase playback. * You can make the setting for Thru Volume only when Line Thru is set to “ON.” • Fade Out: This makes the Line Thru input fade out when phrase playback starts. • Fade In: This makes the Line Thru input fade in when phrase playback ends. 124 Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback * You can make the setting for Fade Out or Fade In only when Line Thru is set to “ON.” While making the Line Thru settings, you can play the phrase selected before you made the settings by pressing the PLAY button. This lets you verify the Line Thru operation as you make the settings. Procedure for Making Line Thru Settings 1. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.2 Line Thru,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Line Thru (OFF or ON), then press the dial. fig.20-g01e * You can make the setting for Thru Volume only when you have selected Line Thru “ON.” 5. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade Out (time: 00.5 sec to 59.9 sec), then press the dial. fig.20-g02e * You can make the setting for Fade Out only when you have selected Line Thru “ON.” The equalizer can be used to obtain the desired sound quality for the playback of audio phrases. A setting of 0 dB produces flat characteristics (the state of the original sound). • Low: This adjusts the sound quality of the low band. This performs adjustment within a range of -12 dB to +12 dB (Low Gain), with a reference frequency of 200 Hz or 400 Hz. • High: This adjusts the sound quality of the high band. This performs adjustment within a range of -12 dB to +12 dB (High Gain), with a reference frequency of 3 kHz or 6 kHz. • Attenuation: Depending on the equalizer settings, sound may be distorted. If this happens, set Attenuation within a range of -12 dB to 0 dB. However, note that the output level also drops when this value is set to anything other than 0 dB. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade In (time: 00.5 sec to 59.9 sec), then press the dial. * You can make the setting for Fade Out only when you have selected Line Thru “ON.” 7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “No,” then press the ENTER button. 8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 9. Press the MODE button. Boosting the level of the low band (by shifting it more toward the plus side) makes the bass more prominent. This produces a heavier, more impressive sound. Lowering the level of the low band (by shifting it more toward the minus side) cuts the bass. This makes narration phrases and the like easier to hear. Boosting the level of the high band (by shifting it more toward the plus side) makes the treble more prominent and improves drop-out. Boosting it too much imparts a sharp feel. Lowering the level of the high band (by shifting it more toward the minus side) cuts the treble and produces a milder sound. Lowering it too much imparts a muffled or murky feel. 125 Applications 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Thru Volume (0 to 100%), then press the dial. Adjusting the Sound Quality During Audio Phrase Playback (Equalizer) Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback Procedure for Making the Equalizer Settings 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.3 Equalizer,” then press the dial. fig.20-g03e 3. Turn the SELECT dial to set Switch to “ON,” then press the dial. 4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Low Freq (to 200 or 400 Hz), then press the dial. 5. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Low Gain (at a value from -12 dB to +12 dB), then press the dial. 6. Turn the SELECT dial to set High Freq (to 3 or 6 kHz), then press the dial. 7. Turn the SELECT dial to set the High Gain (at a value from -12 dB to +12 dB), then press the dial. 8. If distortion is a problem, turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Attenuation (-12 dB to 0 dB), then press the dial. You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY button. This makes it possible to make the setting while monitoring the actual sound quality. 9. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 10. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE(BACK) button. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. 126 Keeping the Output Volume Unchanged (Input Volume Thru) This deactivates the OUTPUT VOLUME knob and keeps the output volume level unchanged to prevent accidental operation. * The OUTPUT VOLUME knob can still be used to adjust the headphones volume and MONO OUT (Control Inpout/ Output Terminals) even when Volume Thru is set to “ON.” OFF: The Output Volume control is effective. ON: The Output Volume control is deactivated. When Volume Thru is set to "ON," the volume is fixed at the level obtained when the control is centered (that is, when positioned at 12 o'clock). Procedure for Making the Input Volume Thru Setting 1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up. 2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.4 Input Volume Thru,” then press the dial. 3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Volume Thru (OFF or ON), then press the dial. fig.20-g04e 4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER button to enable the settings. To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button. When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting item selection screen. 5. Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual screen. * Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any settings made up to that point. Appendices 127 Troubleshooting About recording Can’t record a connected device Has the selection of the recording connector (LINE-IN, LINE+MIC-IN, DIGITAL-IN, or MIDI-IN) been made correctly? Make sure the device connected to the connector matches the selected recording connector. → “Selecting the Recording Connector” (p. 43) Recording does not start Control Input Playback (Direct/Program/ Binary ) does not work as intended Select the correct type of control input (Direct, Program, or Binary). You cannot achieve control input playback merely by connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode and match the method used for connecting to the connectors. Phrases in Direct Playback cannot be selected as intended Is the trigger recording setting set to LOW, MID, or HIGH? Phrases are assigned to Ports 1 to 16 by means of settings made on the AR-3000. In trigger recording, recording starts automatically when the audio input is of a higher level than the trigger level (lever for starting recording). When a card is formatted, the assignments are Port No. 1– phrase A0001, Port No. 2–phrase A0002,..., Port No. 16– phrase A0016. If you are not conducting trigger recording, set it to “OFF.” → “Assigning Phrases to the Ports” (p. 88) → “Trigger Recording Setting” (p. 48) Phrases in Direct Playback do not stop playing. About playback Phrases are not played back (PAUSE indicator lit in orange). Is the MTC “Sync Source” set to “MTC?” When not synchronizing playback with MTC and using the AR-3000 as a slave, set “Sync Source” on the AR-3000 to “INTERNAL.” Check the phrase settings and make sure that “Repeat Play” is not set to “ON.” → “Repeat Play” (p. 57) In Program Playback, phrases cannot be selected as intended. The assignments of phrases in the Program Playback sequence are made with settings on the unit. Pattern phrases and song phrases are not played back as intended When a card is formatted, the assignments are No. 1–phrase A0001, No. 2–phrase A0002,..., No. 100–phrase A0100. When creating a pattern phrase or song phrase, you can choose actual phrases with constituents from both card A and card B. At the time of playback, however, if the card containing the constituent phrases is not inserted, playback will not occur in the normal fashion. (If a constituent phrase is not present, the unit seeks and plays back the next phrase.) Make sure the phrases assigned during creation exist on the cards. → “Registering Phrases” (p. 92) →“Pattern phrase” (p. 61) →“Song phrase” (p. 64) The start of phrase playback is delayed when playback is controlled from an external device Has the “Delay Time” been set for the phrase? Try playing back the phrase by pressing the AR-3000’s PLAY button (manual operation). If the start of playback is delayed, check the AR-3000 to confirm whether or not the delay time has been set. →“Delay Time” (p. 55) If the playback is correct when you press the AR-3000’s PLAY button, check the control signals being sent from the external control device, connections and so on once more. 128 Dual Mono playback does not work as intended. In the system settings, is “Dual Mono Mode” set to “OFF (STEREO 1ch)?” When you are using Dual Mono mode, be sure to set this to “ON (MONO 2ch).” Also, Dual Mono mode playback is subject to a wide variety of conditions. Check these carefully when using. For detailed information about the conditions, refer to “What Is Dual Mono Mode?” (p. 119). Troubleshooting The RS-232C port connection does not work as intended. In the RS-232C settings, do you have the correct “Baud Rate” selected? When you are using the RS-232C port, select a value that matches that of the equipment you are using. In addition, check the device connections for the RS-232C connector. → “Baud Rate Setting” (p. 118) The AR-LINK function does not work as intended In the AR-LINK settings, is “AR-LINK Mode” set to “OFF?” When using AR-LINK, set this to “MASTER” or “SLAVE” to match your usage conditions. In addition, check the device connections (OUT, IN) for the AR-LINK connector. Check the AR-3000 to confirm that the AR-LINK device ID settings are correct. About playback and recording of MIDI phrases MIDI phrases cannot be recorded correctly Some MIDI sequencers output MIDI sound generator setup messages (tone settings for each part, volume information, effects data, and so on) when a song is selected, and this may prevent MIDI messages from being recorded correctly when recording with the AR-3000 begins. In such instances, start recording with the AR-3000 first, then after this select and play back the song from the MIDI sequencer. MIDI data cannot be recorded Is “MIDI-IN” selected as the recording connector? When you’re recording MIDI data, choose “MIDI-IN” as the recording connector. • Is “OUT” selected for MIDI output (MIDI OUT or THRU)? OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the AR3000. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR3000 is not sent. • Is the MIDI Receive channel set to “OFF?” → “MIDI Receive Channel (MIDI Channel) Settings” (p. 108) About MIDI Control Playback Phrases cannot be played back as intended in MIDI Control Playback The assignments of phrases to the note numbers for Program Change 1 are made with settings on the unit. When a card is formatted, the assignments are Program Change 1, C-1: A0001 through G9: A0128. Also, you can assign 128 phrases of your choosing to Program Change 1, but please be aware that the phrase assignments to other program changes cannot be changed (see below). * The 1,000 phrases on card A are assigned to Program Changes 21 through 30, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. * The 1,000 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes 71 through 80, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. * For compatibility with the AR-2000 format, 500 phrases on card A and 500 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes 2 through 6 and 7 through 11, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed. * By transmitting program change 128, you can then send a Note On message for a note number to interrupt a currently playing phrase. →“Assignment of Phrases to Note Numbers (MIDI Note Map)” (p. 107) The displayed tempo for a MIDI phrase remains at 120. The initial tempo of the AR-3000 is 120, so even if you record MIDI data having variable tempo to a MIDI phrase, tempo information is not recorded. This means that the displayed tempo does not change during playback of MIDI phrases, but this is not a defect. 129 Appendices → “Recording and Playing Back MIDI Data (MIDI Phrases)”– ”Selecting the Recording Connector” (p. 83) MIDI phrases are not played back Troubleshooting Operation cannot be synchronized • Is the MIDI output (MIDI OUT or THRU) selected correctly? OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the AR3000. Select this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages. THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000 is not sent. • Are the MTC “Sync Source” and “Sync Out” set correctly? Make the correct settings to match the circumstances, according to whether the AR-3000 is the master or the slave. • If using MTC, are both devices set to the same MTC type? →“Selecting the MTC Type (30/29N/29D/25/24)” (p. 115) • Check the AR-3000 to confirm that the MIDI device ID settings are correct. → “MIDI device ID settings” (p. 111). Other Effects No sound • Reconfirm that the power to the AR-3000 or connected device is on. • Reconfirm that the volume control on the AR-3000 or connected device is turned up. • Reconfirm that there are no shorts in any connector cables. The volume level of the instrument connected to LINE IN is too low. Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor? Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor. There is a scraping sound coming from the AR3000 In situations such as when control signals are input continuously, the movement of the internal relays may make a scraping sound, but this does not indicate any malfunction. To prevent overuse and failure of the relay, you may alsoswitch to Repeat Playback in order to have the relay move only once. → “Repeat Play” (p. 57) 130 Sound input to the Mic jack is not output from the audio output jacks. Sound input to the Mic jack is output from the audio output jacks only during recording or recording standby (REC-In: LINE+MIC-IN). Please be aware that output at times other than recording or recording standby (REC-In: LINE+MIC-IN) is not possible. The appearance of parameters on the display is strange. It is possible that the unit is set to display things in Japanese. Follow the steps below to return to English display. 1. While holding down the PAUSE button, turn on the power. 2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the display language “English.” 3. Press the ENTER button to confirm the setting and return to the screen displayed at powerup. Error messages If there has been a mistake in operation, or if the AR-3000 is unable to continue processing as you directed, an error message will appear in the display. Note the message that appears, and take the appropriate action. Regarding Cards Display: Write-protected Cannot write card Situation: The card's write-protect switch is on. Action: Refer to the owner's manual for the PC card and switch off the write-protect switch. Display: Cannot change to AR-2000 card. Situation: Because the card is in AR-2000 format, setting changes and the like cannot be written to the card. Incorrect format. Format card. Action: Convert the card to AR-3000 format, or use another card that is in AR-3000 format. Situation: The PC card is not formatted for use with the AR-3000. Display: Battery low. Action: Format the PC card. Situation: The voltage of the card's battery has dropped. Display: Card damaged. Format card. Action: Replace the battery for the card. Situation: It is possible that the data in the PC card or the PC card itself has been damaged. Playback Related Action: Format the PC card. If formatting is not possible, or if the same message appears after the card has been formatted, it may be that the PC card is malfunctioning. Use a different PC card. Display: No card inserted. Insert a card. Situation: No card is inserted into either of the card slots. Action: Insert a card. Display: Replace battery. Display: Cannot play back. Check phrase. Situation: Either the phrase data is damaged, or the AR3000 is not able to handle the phrase. Action: Check the phrase for which the message was displayed. Card full. Delete phrases. Display: No corresponding phrase. Situation: Data cannot be stored on the card because there is no free space. Situation: Action: Increase the amount of free space on the card, such as by deleting unneeded phrases. There is no phrase corresponding to the specified phrase. Action: Select a saved phrase or record a new phrase. Display: Unsupported card. Change cards. Recording Related Situation: This memory card cannot be used by the AR3000. Action: Use an AR-3000 PC card Display: Display: No signal from Digital In jack. Situation: There is no signal input from the Digital In jack. Card protected. Write Failure. Action: Send signals from the digitally connected equipment. Situation: Card protect is set to ON, so data cannot be written to the card. Display: Card access error. Change conditions Action: Set card protect to OFF. Situation: Data was not written to or read from the card in time. Action: Change the RDAC-Grade, RDAC-Mode, or other recording conditions to reduce the amount of data. 131 Appendices Display: Error messages Editing Display: Display: Cannot set for selected phrase. Situation: A setting item does not correspond to the selected phrase. Action: Reselect a phrase for which the setting can be made, or record a new phrase. Playback point is set. Display: Unconvertible pattern phrase(s) Display: Cannot convert, song phrase(s). Display: Phr. after No.501 Cannot convert. MIDI Related Display: Phrase(s) stored Display: Buffer overflow Modify trans. Situation: More MIDI data was received in a short time than the AR-3000 was able to process. Action: Change the way in which MIDI data is being transmitted. Display: Display: MIDI Out at THRU Nothing sent. Situation: Situation: Because MIDI output is set to THRU, MIDI data cannot be sent. The RDAC-Grades, RDAC-Modes, or recording types of the phrases being played back on the master and on the slave are different. Action: Action: Set MIDI output to OUT. Make sure the phrases being played back on the master and the slave have the same RDAC- Display: No Active Sense Recording stopped Situation: MIDI Active Sense was interrupted. Action: Check the status of the transmitter and the MIDI cable connections. Display: MIDI checksum Situation: Action: after No. 501. Regarding AR-LINK PhraseTypesDiffer Can't sync play Grade, RDAC-Mode, and recording type. Display: Phrase not found. Can't sync playbk Situation: Because the phrase specified by AR-LINK does not exist, synchronized playback is not possible. error. Action: Specify a phrase that exists on the slave side. Checksum error found in received MIDI data. Display: More than one AR-LINK master. Check the transmission status and the MIDI data. Situation: No more than one AR-LINK master may exist on a single network. System Related Action: Set to "Slave." Display: Unit overheated. Let heat escape. Display: AR-LINK master. Situation: The AR-3000 gets hot. Situation: Action: Ventilate well to avoid overheating, and keep the unit cool. On the device set as the AR-LINK master, IN cannot be used. Action: Do not connect to AR-LINK IN on the device Can't conn. to IN set as "Master." Regarding Card Conversion * Refer to the Card Conversion List (p. 80). Display: Card conv. error Not enough space Display: Unconvertible record setting(s) 132 Cards Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart When Using a Single PM Series Roland PC Card with Recording Type at “Mono.” fig. 21-01-j RDAC-Grade PM-008 (8MB) S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE RDAC-Grade PM-016 (16MB) S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE RDAC-Grade PM-024 (24MB) S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE MODE2* MODE1 01:48 02:42 00:29 00:44 01:58 01:58 02:57 00:40 01:01 02:42 02:42 04:04 00:59 01:28 03:56 03:56 05:54 01:21 02:02 05:25 05:25 08:08 02:42 04:04 10:51 10:51 16:17 PM-040 (40MB) RDAC-Grade MODE3 01:48 RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 00:55 01:23 MODE3 03:42 01:00 01:30 04:01 04:01 06:02 01:23 02:05 05:33 05:33 08:20 02:00 03:01 08:03 08:03 12:05 02:46 04:10 11:06 11:06 16:40 05:33 08:20 22:13 22:13 33:20 RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 01:52 02:48 MODE3 07:27 MODE2* MODE1 07:27 11:14 02:02 03:03 08:09 08:09 12:14 02:48 04:12 11:14 11:14 16:51 04:04 06:07 16:18 16:18 24:28 05:37 08:25 22:28 22:28 33:43 11:14 16:51 44:57 44:57 1:07:26 S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE PM-080 (80MB) MODE2* MODE1 03:42 05:33 RDAC-Grade S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 00:27 00:40 S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE PM-184 (184MB) RDAC-Grade RDAC-Grade PM-004 (4MB) S-HIGH HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 ANNOUNCE RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 04:43 07:04 MODE3 18:52 MODE2* MODE1 18:52 28:18 05:08 07:42 20:32 20:32 07:04 10:36 28:18 28:18 42:27 10:16 15:24 41:05 41:05 1:01:38 14:09 21:13 56:36 56:36 1:24:54 28:18 42:27 1:53:12 1:53:12 2:49:48 30:48 RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 09:27 14:10 MODE3 37:48 MODE2* MODE1 37:48 56:42 10:17 15:26 41:09 41:09 1:01:44 14:10 21:16 56:43 56:43 1:25:04 20:34 30:52 1:22:20 1:22:20 2:03:31 28:21 42:32 1:53:26 1:53:26 2:50:09 56:42 1:25:04 3:46:52 3:46:52 5:40:18 RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 32:39 21:46 MODE3 1:27:05 MODE2* MODE1 1:27:05 2:10:38 23:41 35:32 1:34:48 1:34:48 2:22:11 32:39 48:59 2:10:38 2:10:38 3:15:57 47:22 1:11:05 3:09:40 3:09:40 4:44:30 1:05:19 1:37:58 4:21:16 4:21:16 6:31:55 2:10:38 3:15:57 8:42:33 8:42:33 13:03:50 RDAC-Mode H-LINEAR LINEAR 02:49 04:13 MODE3 11:16 MODE2* MODE1 11:16 16:55 03:04 04:36 12:16 12:16 18:25 04:13 06:20 16:55 16:55 25:22 06:08 09:12 24:34 24:34 36:51 08:27 12:41 33:50 33:50 50:45 16:55 25:22 1:07:41 1:07:41 1:41:31 *Minimum recording times are listed only for MODE2. Depending on conditions, you may be able to attain recording times longer than listed here. • The times given above are the maximum times that can be expected when continuous recording of one phrase has been carried out. You should note that the actual time available will be less when more than one phrase is recorded. Also, because a single card can contain a mixture of phrases having different recording settings (grade and mode), maximum recording time varies depending on the recording settings (p. 42) of the respective phrases. Use the above chart as a reference when you are recording. • The times just described are recording and playback times for audio phrases. For a recording of a MIDI phrase (p. 82), the amount of card space used is related not only to the recording time, but also to size of the phrase itself. Please be aware that this chart is not applicable when you are recording MIDI phrases. 133 Appendices • The times just described are recording and playback times when the recording type is set to “Mono.” The times are halved when set to “Stereo.” Cards Settings When a Card Is Formatted When a card is formatted, the values of various settings will be as shown below. Control input settings ●5.1 Control Input Mode: DIRECT PLAY ●5.2 Direct Play: NORMAL • Phrase assignment Port No. Phrase Recording settings 1 A0001 or B0001 ●Recording Connector: LINE-IN 2 A0002 or B0002 ●RDAC-Grade: STANDARD 3 A0003 or B0003 ●RDAC-Mode: MODE3 4 A0004 or B0004 ●Recording Type: STEREO 5 A0005 or B0005 ●Trigger Recording Setting: OFF 6 A0006 or B0006 ●MIDI Time Base: 192 7 A0007 or B0007 8 A0008 or B0008 Phrase messages 9 A0009 or B0009 ●1.1 Playback Volume: 100 % 10 A0010 or B0010 ●1.2 Delay Time: 00s00f 11 A0011 or B0011 ●1.3 Playback Point: MANUAL 12 A0012 or B0012 Start: 00h00m00s00f0sf 13 A0013 or B0013 End: The realtime of the phrase 14 A0014 or B0014 ●1.4 Repeat Play: OFF 15 A0015 or B0015 ●1.5 Loop Play: OFF 16 A0016 or B0016 ●1.6 Fade • Fade In: OFF • Fade Out: OFF ●1.7 Control Out: OFF ●1.8 MIDI Tempo: 120 * A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is inserted when formatting. ●5.3 Program Play • Programs 1 played back in order No.1: Phrase A0001 or B0001 ●1.9 Phrase Name: AR-3000 1 (Card Name + Phrase No.) Card editing ●4.5 Card Protect: OFF ●4.6 Card Name: AR-3000 ↓ No.100: Phrase A0100 or B0100 • Programs 2 through 5 played back in order No.1: Phrase ----↓ No.100: Phrase ----- * A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is inserted when formatting. ●5.4 Binary Play • Level: ON • Edge: OFF ●5.5 Terminal Rec • Phrase Select: BINARY1 134 Cards MIDI Settings ●9.3 Equalizer ●6.1 MIDI Output (OUT or THRU):OUT • Switch: OFF ●6.2 MIDI Note Map • Low Freq: 200 Hz • Low Gain: 0 dB • Program Change 1 C-1: PhraseA0001 or B0001 ↓ G9: PhraseA0128 or B0128 * A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is inserted when formatting. • Hi Freq: 6 kHz • Hi Gain: 0 dB • Attenuation: 0dB ●9.4 Input Volume Thru: OFF ●9.5 Busy Out ●6.3 MIDI Note Out: OFF • Delay Time: ON ●6.4 MIDI Channel: OFF • Phrase Play: ON ●6.5 Note Trigger: TRIGGER • Repeat Int: ON ●6.6 Receive Message ●9.6 Display Sleep: OFF • Note On Velocity: OFF • Panpot: OFF • Expression: OFF ●6.7 MIDI Device ID: 1 ●6.8 MMC Mode: OFF ●6.9 MTC • Sync Source: INTERNAL • Sync Out: OFF • MTC Type: 30 • MTC Error Level: 5 RS-232C Settings ●7.1 Baud Rate: 9600 bps AR-LINK Settings ●8.1 AR-LINK Mode: OFF System Settings Recorded Phrase Data When a piece of Phrase data recorded by the AR-3000, the settings of data on the card will be as follows. Phrase Settings Playback Volume: 100% Delay Time: 00s00f Playback Point: • Start: 00h00m00s00f0sf • End: The realtime of the phrase Repeat Play: OFF Loop Play: OFF Fade: • Fade In: OFF • Fade Out: OFF ●9.1 Dual Mono Mode: OFF(STEREO 1ch) Control Out: OFF ●9.2 Line Thru MIDI Tempo: 120 Phrase Name: AR-3000 1 • Line Thru: ON Appendices • Thru Volume: 0 % (AR-3000 + Phrase No.) • Fade Out: OFF • Fade In: OFF 135 Terminals Specifications of the Control Input/Output Terminals fig.21-02e Rated output level: +4 dBu Output Impedance: 500 ohm Recommended Load Impedance: 10 k-ohms or greater * The control I/O connector cannot be used to switch the power to the AR unit on or off. 1 * The output levels may change for stereo and mono audio phrases. 1 2 3 When making connections to the ports, be careful not to lose the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a physician. 1. Control Input Trigger Signal Format: On, Off (Open, Close), Pulse width: 20 msec or more Contact capacity: DC 24 V, 0.1 A or more RS-232C Connector Specifications Input: Photocoupler Pins used for control input: • Direct playback: 1–16, STOP, COM • Program playback: START, STOP, INC, DEC, EXCHANGE, COM • Binary playback: 1–10, 11, START, STOP, COM • Control-port recording : 1–10, 11, 13, 14, COM * Time from make-contact onset until playback starts is approximately 40 ms (typ.). However, please be aware that this may vary slightly depending on card type. * During binary playback, complete input specifying binary signals within 50 ms. * The two common (COM) connectors are connected internally, so you can achieve operation by making the connection to either one. In cases such as when you are connecting the control connectors of a number of AR units with a single make-contact point, connect one COM connector on each AR unit to each other. However, do not intermix this unit with other AR series devices. Doing so may result in unstable operation. 2. Control Output Signal system: No-voltage make-contact Contact capacity: DC 30 V, 5 A Connectors used with control output: • Busy Out: BUSY OUT • Control Out: CONT OUT, make-contact time: 1 second 3. Audio Output Ports (MONO OUT) MONO OUT is an audio output (mono, unbalanced) ports. 136 Transmission method: Start-Stop synchronous system (Asynchronous)Duplex data transmission Baud rate: 4800 /9600/19200/38400 bps Parity: none Data length: 8 bit Stop bit length: 1 bit Code set: ASCII * The setting "38400" bps is for compatibility with legacy models (AR-2000/1). However, it is a value for the communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C standards. fig.21-03e Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name NC RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS NC Pin Connection 5 9 1 6 Windows98, Windows95 compatible CPU AR-3000 Computer 1 : NC 2 : RXD 3 : TXD 4 : DTR 5 : GND 6 : DSR 7 : RTS 8 : CTS 9 : NC 1 : DCD 2 : RXD 3 : TXD 4 : DTR 5 : GND 6 : DSR 7 : RTS 8 : CTS 9 : RI * Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Terminals In addition to the owner’s manual, the separate publication “RS-232C Reference Notes” is also available for those needing detailed documentation regarding RS-232C connector control. Order from your vendor or Roland Service Center. AR-LINK Connectors Specifications fig.arcon 8 76 ● The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics: • Setup • Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands • Examples of usage algorithms 5 4 3 2 1 AR-LINK IN Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AR-LINK OUT Signal Name CMDCMD+ TRGGND TRG+ CLKNC CLK+ Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name CMD+ CMDTRG+ GND TRGCLK+ NC CLK- Use an RSC-15APL cable (sold separately) to make connections to the AR-LINK port. The cable specifications are as shown below. fig.arcab RSC-15APL mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 8-pin, male 6 78 6 7 8 3 4 5 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Appendices mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 8-pin, male 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 137 MIDI Implementation ● Program Change Model: AR-200/3000 (Audio Recorder) Date: Nov.1,2000 Version: 1.00 1. Receive data (Media Player Section) ■Channel Voice Message ● Note Off Status Second Third 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Velocity : 00H - 7FH (1 - 127) * This stops playback of the phrase for the corresponding note number. (For more on the corresponding phrases, refer to the Note On parameter.) * This is ignored when "Trigger" is selected for MIDI Trigger Mode. * The Note Off Velocity value is ignored. * Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is OFF. When set to 1-16, data is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels. ● Note On Status Second Third 9nH kkH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Velocity : 01H - 7FH (1 - 127) * This plays back the phrase for the corresponding note number. * With Program Change 1 (normally turning the power on), all note numbers (128 numbers) are received. Corresponding phrase numbers may be selected freely. * With Program Changes 21-30, only Note Numbers 00H-63H (0-99) are received. The phrase numbers correspond to 1-1000 on Card A. Phrase assignments cannot be changed. * With Program Changes 71 through 80, only Note Numbers 00H through 63H (0 through 99) are received. The phrase numbers correspond to 1 through 1,000 on Card B (AR-3000 only). Phrase assignments cannot be changed. * With Program Changes 2-6 and 7-11, only Note Numbers 00H-63H (0-99) are received. The phrase numbers correspond to 1-500 on Card A and 1-500 on Card B (AR-3000 only) respectively. Phrase assignments (AR-2000 compatible) cannot be changed. * With Program 128, playback of the phrase in progress is stopped, regardless of the note number. * Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is "OFF." When set to 1-16, data is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels. * The Note On Velocity value changes the playback master volume. * The Note On Velocity value is ignored in Dual Mono mode and MIDI playback. * The Note On Velocity value is ignored when Note On Velocity is set to "Off." ● Control Change ❍ Panpot (Controller number 10) Status Second Third BnH OAH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Panpot : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) (0-64-127) default value = 40H(64) * This is adjustable in 127 steps, with 0 being full left, 64 center, and 127 full right. * When Panpot is off, this is not received. * When MIDI playback is conducted in Dual Mono mode, this is not received. * Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is "OFF." When set to 1-16, data is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels. Status Second CnH ppH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) pp = Program number : 00H - 05H (prog.1 - prog.6) : 06H - 0AH (prog.7 - prog.11) *Only AR-3000 : 14H - 1DH (prog.21 - prog.11) : 46H - 4FHH (prog.71- prog.80) : 7FH (prog.128) * This switches the MIDI note map used for the phrase assignments. * The change goes into effect with the first new Note On after the Program Change is received. This has no effect on phrases being played before the Program Change is received. * Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is OFF. When set to 1-16, data is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels. ■ System Common Message ● Quarter Frame Messages * * * Data is received when Sync Source is set to "MTC." When the Quarter Frame message is received, operation proceeds with the start of the song synchronized to "00h00m00s00f00" with the "Delay Time" added. This acts upon the currently selected audio phrase. MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected. Status Second F1H mmH (= 0nnndddd) nnn = Message type: 0 = Frame count LS nibble 1 = Frame count MS nibble 2 = Seconds count LS nibble 3 = Seconds count MS nibble 4 = Minutes count LS nibble 5 = Minutes count MS nibble 6 = Hours count LS nibble 7 = Hours count MS nibble dddd = 4 bit nibble data : 0h - FH (0 - 15) Bit Field is assigned as follws. Frame Count xxxyyyyy xxx Reserved (000) yyyyy Frame No.(0-29) Seconds Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved (00) yyyyyy Seconds (0-59) Minutes Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved (00) yyyyyy Minutes (0-59) Hours Count xyyzzzzz x Reserved (0) yy Time Code type 0 = 24 Frames / Sec 1 = 25 Frames / Sec 2 = 30 Frames / Sec (Drop Frame) 3 = 30 Frames / Sec (Non Drop Frame zzzzz Hours (0-23) ■ System Exclusive Message Status F0H FOH iiH ID Number ❍ Expression (Controller number 11) Status Second Third BnH 0BH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Expression : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) default value = 7FH (127) * This changes the volume level during playback of a phrase. * When Expression is off, this is not received. * When MIDI playback is conducted in Dual Mono mode, this is not received. * Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is "OFF." When set to 1-16, data is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels. 138 :: dd,.., ee = Data F7H Data Bytes Status iiH, ddH,.., eeH F7H : System Exclusive Message status : an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is. Roland's manufacturer ID is 41H. ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standaerd; Universal Non-Real time Messages (7EH) and Universal Real time Messages (7FH). : 00H-7FH (0-127) :EOX (End of Exclusive Message) The system Exclusive Messages recived by the AR-200/3000 are; Data Set (DT1). Regarding the Data Set (DT1), please refer to "exclusive Communication". MIDI Implementation ● MIDI Time Cord * ❍ Full Messages * Data is received when Sync Source is set to "MTC." When the Quarter Frame message is received, operation proceeds with the start of the song synchronized to "00h00m00s00f00" with the "Delay Time" added. * This acts upon the currently selected audio phrase. * MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected. Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 01H, 01H, 06H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH Byte F0H 7FH dev 01H 01H 06H 01H hrH mnH scH frH F7H F7H Description Status of Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header device ID (or 7FH) sub-ID#1 (MIDI Time Cord) sub-ID#1 (Full Messages) number of bytes [TARGET] sub command Hours Count xyyzzzzz x Reserved (0) yy Time Code type 0 = 24 Frames / Sec 1 = 25 Frames / Sec 2 = 30 Frames / Sec (Drop Frame) 3 = 30 Frames / Sec (Non Drop Frame zzzzz Hours (0-23) Minutes Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved (00) yyyyyy Minutes (0-59) Seconds Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved (00) yyyyyy Seconds (0-59) Frame Count xxxyyyyy xxx Reserved (000) yyyyy Frame No.(0-29) EOX (End of Exclusive) ● MIDI Machine Control (MMC) * * This is Received when the MMC mode is set to "SLAVE." This acts upon the currently selected phrase. ❍STOP (MCS) Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 01H F7H Byte Description F0H Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 01H STOP (MCS) F7H EOX (End of Exclusive Message) * Playback is stopped immediately when this command is received if the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received. ❍ PLAY (MCS) * Data Bytes Status 7FH, dev, 06H, 02H F7H Description Status of Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header device ID (or 7FH) MMC Command Message PLAY (MCS) EOX (End of Exclusive Message) ❍ RECORD STROBE (MCS) Status F0H Byte Data Bytes 7FH, dev, 06H, 06H Status F7H Description F0H Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 06H RECORD STROBE (MCS) F7H EOX (End of Exclusive Message) * Recording of the phrase begins when this command is received if the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received. * If MIDI signal recording is in effect, this command is ignored (MIDI cannot be recorded with MMC). ❍ RECORD EXIT (MCS) Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 07H F7H Byte Description F0H Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 06H RECORD STROBE (MCS) F7H EOX (End of Exclusive Message) * Recording is stopped immediately when this command is received if the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received. * If MIDI signal recording is in effect, this command is ignored (MIDI cannot be recorded with MMC). ❍ LOCATE (MCP) Format 2 - LOCATE [TARGET] Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 44H, 06H, F7H 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH Byte Description F0H Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 44H LOCATE(MCP) 06H Number of Bytes 01H [TARGET] sub command hrH Standard time with Sub Frame mnH scH frH ffH F7H EOX (End of Exclusive Message) * If the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received, then when this command is received, the location of the time code specified in the command data is located. * MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected. Appendices Status F0H Byte F0H 7FH dev 06H 02H F7H Playback is started immediately when this command is received if the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received. Playback is started immediately when this command is received if the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received. ❍ DEFERRED PLAY (MCS) Status F0H Byte F0H 7FH dev 06H 03H F7H Data Bytes Status 7FH, dev, 06H, 03H F7H Description Status of Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header device ID (or 7FH) MMC Command Message DEFERRED PLAY (MCS) EOX (End of Exclusive Message) 139 MIDI Implementation 2. Transmitted data (Media Player Section) 2.1 Transmitted messages while a phrase is being played back The stored MIDI message are transmitted When the MIDI phrase will playback after OUT is set in the MIDI OUT. In this case, AR-200/3000 is not transmitted MIDI messages which are received. 2.2 Transmitted message which are received. When THRU is set in the MIDI OUT, AR-200/3000 transmits message which are received. time with the start of the song set to "00h00m00s00f00" with the "Delay Time" added. MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is selected. status second * F1H mmH (= 0nnndddd) Regarding the Quarter Frame, please refer to "Receive data (Media Player Section) ~Quarter Frame~". ■ System Exclusive Message ● MIDI Time Cord ❍ Full Message * 2.3 Transmitted message which are produced. When OUT is set in the MIDI OUT, AR-200/3000 transmits the following produced messages. ■Channel Voice Message ● Note Off Status Second Third 8nH kkH 40H n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H -- FH (ch.1--ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H--7FH (0--127) * After the MIDI Phrase is stopped, AR-200/3000 produces Note off message for received notes remains on. * When Note On is sent at the start of an audio performance, the same note number as that of the Note On is transmitted. For more information about sending notes, refer to the Note On section below. ● Note ON Status Second Third 9nH kkH 7FH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H--7FH (0--127) * At the start of the audio phrase performance, the note number defined in the MIDI note map is sent.In this instance, if multiple note numbers are selected in the phrase, only the lowest note number is transmitted. * There is no transmission when the Note Send setting is set to "OFF" (Note Send settings are available only with the AR-3000). * Data is not output if the MIDI Receive channel setting is "OFF." When set to 1-16, data is transmitted only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is transmitted on Channel 1. * There is no transmission during playback of MIDI phrases. ● Control Change ❍ Hold1 OFF Status Second Third BnH 40H 00H n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16) * *After the MIDI Phrase is stopped, AR-200/3000 produces Note off message for received notes remains on. ■ Channel Mode Message ● All Note Off (Controller No. 1 2 3) Status Second Third BnH 7BH 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16) * Transmitted message while a phrase is being played back. 2.4 Recognized message for sync ■ System Realtime Message ● Timing Clock * This is transmitted when Sync Out is set to "MTC" and the location of the phrase is moved. The time count transmitted is the time with the start of the song set to "00h00m00s00f00" and the "Delay Time" added. MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is selected. Data Bytes Status 7FH, dev, 01H, 01H F7H hrH, mnH, scH, frH Regarding the MIDI Time Cord, please refer to "Receive data (Media Player Section) ~MIDI Time Cord~". Status F0H ● MIDI Machine Control (MMC) * Data is transmitted when MMC mode is set to "MASTER." ❍ STOP (MCS) Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 01H F7H Byte Description F0H Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID 06H MMC Command Message 01H STOP (MCS) F7H EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) * When "STOP" is pressed, a Device ID of 7FH is transmitted. ❍ DEFERRED PLAY (MCS) Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 01H F7H Byte Description F0H Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 03H DEFERRED PLAY (MCS) F7H EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) * When "START" is pressed, a Device ID of 7FH is transmitted. ❍ RECORD STROBE (MCS) Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 07H F7H Byte Description F0H Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header 7FH device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 06H RECORD STROBE (MCS) F7H EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) * When recording of a phrase begins, a Device ID of 7FH is transmitted. ❍ RECORD EXIT (MCS) ● Stop Status F0H Byte F0H 7FH dev 06H 07H F7H status FCH * status F8H * Transmitted message while a phrase is being played back. ● Start status FAH ■ System Common Message ● Quarter Frame * This is transmitted when Sync Out is set to "MTC." The time count transmitted is the 140 Data Bytes Status 7FH, dev, 06H, 07H F7H Description Status of System Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header device ID MMC Command Message RECORD EXIT EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) When recording of a phrase is stopped, a Device ID of 7FH is transmitted MIDI Implementation ❍ LOCATE (MCP) ■ Channel Mode Message format2 - LOCATE [TARGET] Status Data Bytes Status F0H 7FH, dev, 06H, 44H, 06H F7H 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH Byte Description F0H Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header dev device ID (or 7FH) 06H MMC Command Message 44H LOCATE (MCP) 06H Number of byte 01H [TARGET] sub command hrH Standard time with Sub Frame mnH scH frH ffH F7H EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) * When the location is moved, a Device ID of 7FH is transmitted. * MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is selected. ● All Sound Off 3. Receive data (MIDI Recorder Section) 3.1 Message memorized during recording ■Channel Voice Message ● Note Off Status Second Third 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Velocity : 00H - 7FH (1 - 127) ● Note On Status Second Third 9nH kkH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Velocity : 01H - 7FH (1 - 127) ● Polyphonic Key Pressure Status Second Third AnH kkH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Note No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = value : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) ●Control Change ● Program Change Status Second Third CnH ppH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) pp = Program No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) ● Channel Pressure Status Second BnH kkH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = value : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) ● Pitch Bend Change Status Second EnH llH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) ● Reset All Controller Status Second Third BnH 78H 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) ● Local On / Off Status Second Third BnH 7AH vvH n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) vv = value : 00H, 7FH (OFF, ON) ● MONO Status Second Third BnH 7EH mmH n = MIDI channnel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) mm = mono number : 00H - 10H (0 - 16) * The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received. ● POLY Status Second Third BnH 7EH 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) mm = mono number : 00H - FH (0 - 16) * The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received. ■ System Exclusive Message Status F0H FOH iiH ID Number dd,.., ee = Data F7H Data Bytes Status iiH, ddH,.., eeH F7H : System Exclusive Message status : an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is. Roland's manufacturer ID is 41H. ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard; Universal Non-real time Messages (7EH) and Universal Real time Messages (7FH). : 00H-7FH (0-127) : EOX (End of Exclusive Message) 3.2 Message recording not memorized during ■ Channel Mode Message ● All Note Off Status Second Third BnH 78H 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) * Note Off is generated for any note not set to OFF, and this note off is stored. ● OMNI OFF Status Second Third BnH 78H 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) * The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received. Appendices status Second Third BnH kkH vvH n = MIDI Channel No. : 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = Controller No. : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = value : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Status Second Third BnH 78H 00H n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) ● OMNI ON Status Second Third BnH 7AH vvH n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16) vv = value : 00H, 7FH (OFF, ON) * The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received. 3.3 Recognized control message for remote ■System Real time Message ● Start status F8H * Not received when recording mode is not “Standby”. ● Continue status FBH 141 MIDI Implementation * * ■ Address Block Map Not received when recording mode is not “Standby”. The same processing will be carried out as when Start is received. An outlined address map of the Exclusive Communication is as follows; ● Stop ❍ Exclusive Address Table status FCH * Not received when recording mode is not “record”. 3.4 Messages received for trouble in MIDI connection. detecting ■System Realtime message ● Active Sensing Status FEH * When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds 400 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received, and message interval monitoring will be halted. 4. Transmit data (MIDI Recorder Section) When AR-200/3000 is in MIDI Recorder mode, MIDI Messages is not transmitted. 5. Exclusive Communication Exclusive message model IDs that can be used on the AR-200 and AR-3000 are OOH, 38H (AR-200), 00H, and 37H (AR-3000). The Device Id can be set to 00H to 1FH. Only received when AR-200/3000 is in Media Player Section. ● Data Set 1 DT1 (12H) Byte F0H 41H dev mdl 12H aaH : ccH ddH : kkH sum F7H Description Status of System Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header device ID (dev : 00H--1FH) Model ID (mdl : 00H, 38H) AR-200 (mdl : 00H, 37H) AR-3000 Command ID (DT1) address MSB : Address LSB Data : Data Check Sum EOX (End of System Exclusive Message) 5.1 Parameter Address Map This map indicates address,size, data (range), Parameter, Description,and default Value of parameters which can be transferred using "Data Set1(DT1)." All the numbers of address, size, Data, and default Value are indicated in 7-bit Hexadecimal-form. (AR-200 Model ID=00H,38H) (AR-3000 Model ID=00H,37H) (Only AR-3000) Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 00 00 10 00 00 08 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 4bits 11# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 12# 00 - 05 Grade 0:ANNOUNCE 1:LONG2 2:LONG1 3:STANDARD 4:HIGH 5:S-HIGH 13# 00 - 04 R-DAC mode 0:Linear 1:Mode1 2:Mode2 3:Mode3 4:H-LINEAR 14# 00 - 01 REC type 0:MONO 1:STEREO 15# 00 - 03 REC Trigger Level 0:OFF 1:LOW 2:MID 3:HIGH 16# 00 - 03 REC Source 0:LINE-IN 1:LINE+MIC-IN 2:DIGITAL-IN 3:MIDI-IN 17# 00 - 01 TimeBase 0:192 1:240 =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) * * A0001-A1000 00 00 - 07 67 B0001-B1000 07 68 - 0H 4F Only received packet data. When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if the phrase already exists, the AR-3000 ignores this SysEx message. (AR-2000 compatible) Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 3bits 01# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 02# 00 - 04 Grade 0:ANNOUNCE 1:LONG2 2:LONG1 3:STANDARD 4:HIGH 03# 00 - 02 R-DAC mode 0:Linear 1:Mode1 2:Mode2 04# 00 - 01 REC type 0:MONO 1:STEREO 05# 00 - 03 REC Trigger Level 0:OFF 1:LOW 2:MID 3:HIGH 06# 00 - 01 REC Source 0:ANALOG-IN (MIDI REC OFF) 1:MIDI-IN (MIDI REC ON) 07# 00 - 01 TimeBase 0:192 1:240 =================================================================== * * * 142 for recording setting Phrase number DATA(H) A0001 - A0500 00 00 - 03 73 B0001 - B0500 03 74 - 07 67 Only received packet data. When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if the phrase already exists, the AR-3000 ignores this SysEx message. ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000. MIDI Implementation ❍ Exclusive Address Table Recording setting AR-3000) (Replacement Recording) (Only Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 00 01 10 00 00 08 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 4bits 11# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 12# 00 - 05 Grade 0:ANNOUNCE 1:LONG2 2:LONG1 3:STANDARD 4:HIGH 5:S-HIGH 13# 00 - 02 R-DAC mode 0:Linear 1:Mode1 2:Mode2 3:Mode3 4:H-Linear 14# 00 - 01 REC type 0:MONO 1:STEREO 15# 00 - 03 REC Trigger Level 0:OFF 1:LOW 2:MID 3:HIGH 16# 00 - 03 REC Source 0:LINE-IN 1:LINE+MIC-IN 2:DIGITAL-IN 3:MIDI-IN 17# 00 - 01 TimeBase 0:192 1:240 =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) AR-200/3000 Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 01 00 10 00 00 02 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 4bits 11#‘ 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) * * A0001 - A1000 B0001 - B1000 Only received packet data. V 00 00 - 07 67 (AR-200/AR-3000) 07 68 - 0F 4F (AR-3000) (AR-100/2000 compatible) Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 01 00 00 00 00 02 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 3bits 01# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) A0001 - A0500 00 00 - 03 73 (AR-200/AR-3000) B0001 - B0500 03 74 - 07 67 (AR-3000) * Only received packet data. * When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-200/3000 changes to the current (currently displayed) phrase number. ❍Exclusive Address Table Recording Settings (Replacement Recording) AR-200/3000 Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 01 00 10 00 00 03 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 4bits 11# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 12# 00 - 02 REC Source 0:ANALOG-IN 1:LINE+MIC-IN 2:DIGITAL-IN 3:MIDI-IN =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) A0001 - A1000 00 00 - 07 67 (AR-200/AR-3000) B0001 - B1000 07 68 - 0F 4F (AR-3000) * * * Only received packet data. When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000 deletes that phrase and goes into REC PAUSE mode. REC Source 1 and 2 can be set only on the AR-3000, and cannot be set on the AR-200. (AR-100/2000 compatible) Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 01 00 00 00 00 03 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 3bits 01# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 02# 00 - 01 REC Source 0:ANALOG-IN (MIDI REC OFF) 1:MIDI-IN (MIDI REC ON) =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) A0001 - A0500 00 00 - 03 73 (AR-200/AR-3000) B0001 - B0500 03 74 - 07 67 (AR-3000) * Only received packet data. * When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000 deletes that phrase and goes into REC PAUSE mode. * ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000. 143 Appendices A0001 - A1000 00 00 - 07 67 B0001 - B1000 07 68 - 0F 4F * Only received packet data. * When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000 deletes that phrase and goes into REC PAUSE mode. (AR-2000 compatible) Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description =================================================================== 00 01 00 00 00 08 00 - 07 Phrase Number upper 3bits 01# 00 - 7f Phrase Number lower 7bits 02# 00 - 04 Grade 0:ANNOUNCE 1:LONG2 2:LONG1 3:STANDARD 4:HIGH 03# 00 - 02 R-DAC mode 0:Linear 1:Mode1 2:Mode2 04# 00 - 01 REC type 0:MONO 1:STEREO 05# 00 - 03 REC Trigger Level 0:OFF 1:LOW 2:MID 3:HIGH 06# 00 - 01 REC Source 0:ANALOG-IN (MIDI REC OFF) 1:MIDI-IN (MIDI REC ON) 07# 00 - 01 TimeBase 0:192 1:240 =================================================================== Phrase number DATA(H) A0001 - A0500 00 00 - 03 73 B0001 - B0500 03 74 - 07 67 * Only received packet data. * When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000 goes into REC PAUSE mode. However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000 deletes that phrase and goes into REC PAUSE mode. * ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000. ❍Exclusive Address Table Phrase Select AUDIO RECORDER Date : Dec. 1, 2000 MIDI Implementation Chart Model AR-3000 Version : 1.00 Media Player Section Transmitted Remarks Recognized Function ... *1 Memorized Basic Channel Default Changed All channels x Mode Default Message Altered x x **************** x x *2 *2 0 –127 **************** x *2 True Voice Velocity Note ON Note OFF o o *1 *1 x x After Touch Key's Ch's o o *1 *1 x x o *1 x o o o *1 *1 *1 x x x o **************** *1 *2 x 1–11, 21–30, 71–80 *1 *3 o x x x x Note Number : Pitch Bend 10 11 0 – 119 x 1–16 x *2 *2 Panpot Expression Messages other than the above Control Change Program Change : True # System Exclusive System Common : Quarter Frame : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune o x x x x System Real Time : Clock : Commands o o *1 x x : All Sounds OFF : Reset All Controllers Aux : Local ON/OFF Messages : All Notes OFF : Active Sensing : System Reset o o x o x x *1 *1 x x x x x x Notes *1 Transmitted only during MIDI phrase playback *2 o x is selectable. *3 Transmitted when Sync Out is at MTC. *4 Received when Sync Source is at MTC. *1 Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO 144 *4 o : Yes x : No AUDIO RECORDER Date : Dec. 1, 2000 MIDI Implementation Chart Model AR-3000 Version : 1.00 MIDI Recording Section Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function ... Basic Channel Default Changed x x all channels x Mode Default Message Altered x x **************** x x True Voice x **************** 0 –127 0 –127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF x x o o After Touch Key's Ch's x x o o x o x o x **************** o 0 –127 o x x x x Note Number : Pitch Bend 0 –119 Not Basic Channel Control Change Program Change : True # System Exclusive : Quarter Frame : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune System Real Time : Clock : Commands x x *1 Appendices System Common x x x x x x o o o x o ( 123–127 ) o x : All Sounds OFF : Reset All Controllers Aux : Local ON/OFF Messages : All Notes OFF : Active Sensing : System Reset x x x x x x Notes Mode messages (123–127) are stored/transmitted after All Note Off processing is performed. Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO *1 o : Yes x : No 145 Specification Recording Format Number of phrases RDAC (Roland Digital Audio Coding) Maximum 1000 Phrases (when 1 PC card is used) RDAC-GRADE (Sampling rate) Maximum 2000 phrases (when 2 PC cards are use) S-HIGH: 48kHz Playback method HIGH: 44.1kHz Manual playback STANDARD: 32kHz Direct playback: LONG1: 22.05kHz 16 phrases, 4 modes(Normal, First-In, Last-In, Sequence) LONG2: 16kHz Program playback: 100 phrases, 5 program ANNOUNCE: 8kHz Binary playback: 2000 phrases Playback rate Area Computer-controlled playback: 2000 phrases 100 phrases(continuous play) S-HIGH: 20kHz–22kHz HIGH: 20kHz–20kHz STANDARD: 20kHz–15kHz LONG1: 20kHz–10kHz Equalizer LONG2: 20kHz–7.5kHz High : -12dB – +12dB (3/6kHz, Shelving Type) ANNOUNCE: 20kHz–3.7kHz Low : -12dB – +12dB (200/400Hz, Shelving Type) RDAC-Mode (Signal processing method) MIDI playback: 2000 phrases AR-LINK playback: 2000 phrases Residual Noise Level (Input Short, front sense: middle, rear sense: middle, IHF-A, typ.) H-Linear: 24 bit PCM recording Linear: 16 bit PCM recording Mode 3: 2.5 times extended Recording time than Linear. S/N Ratio Mode 2: 2.5 times more extended Recording time than BALANCED OUTPUT : 90 dB (IHF-A, Typ) Linear. Mode 1: 4 times more extended Recording time than - 80 dBu or less (VCA) RS-232C Recording media Transmission method: Start-Stop synchronous system (Asynchronous)Duplex data transmission PC card (PC Card Standard (1995) compatible, TYPE1.2) Baud rate: 4800 /9600/19200/38400 bps Parity: none Data length: 8 bit Stop bit length: 1 bit Code set: ASCII Linear. Recommended PC cards Roland PC Cards PM series (PCMCIA2.0/2.1, JEDA Ver.4.1/ 4.2 Spec Standard) * In order to recording/playback of audio signal and MIDI data, you will need to purchase one of the PC cards. PC Card Slot 2 Slot (TYPE1, 2) * The setting "38400" bps is for compatibility with legacy models (AR-2000/1). However, it is a value for the communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C standards. Phrase types Display Audio phrases (stereo/mono) 7 Segment 25 characters (Backlit LCD) MIDI phrases 136 x 32 dots Graphic LCD (Backlit) 146 Specification Controllers Dimensions MIC INPUT Volume Knob 482 (W) x 231.4 (D) x 44 (H) mm LINE INPUT Volume Knob 19 (W) x 9-1/8(D) x 1-3/4 (H) inches Card Eject Button (EIA-1U rack mount type) PLAY Button STOP Button PAUSE, BACK Button Weight 2.7 kg/6 lbs EZ SETUP Button Supplied Accessories MODE Button AC Cord ENTER Button Rubber feet SELECT Dial (Doubles As SELECT Button) Card cap OUTPUT Volume Knob Owner’s Manual POWER Switch Options Indicators Roland PM Series CARD ACCESS Indicator Network Board (AR-NT1) PLAY Indicator AR-LINK Cable (RSC-15APL) PAUSE Indicator * 0 dBm=0.775Vrms EZ SETUP Indicator * In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/ or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice. MODE Indicator Connectors MIC IN jack (1/4 inch phone type) LINE IN jacks (MONO/L,R, RCA phono type) DIGITAL IN connector (RCA phono type, Coaxial type, S/P DIF, EIAJ CP-1201-compliant) Control I/O Terminal (25 pin Terminal Block with M3 bolts) MIDI Connectors (OUT/THRU, IN, 5-pin DIN type) RS-232C Connector (9 pin D-sub type) * In addition to the owner’s manual, the separate publication “RS-232C Reference Notes” is also available for those needing detailed documentation regarding RS-232C connector control. Order from your vendor or Roland Service Center. ●The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics: • Setup • Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands • Examples of usage algorithms AR-LINK Connectors (OUT, IN, 8-pin mini DIN type) Audio Output jacks (1/4 inch phone type, TRS balanced) Head Phone jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type) Power Supply Appendices AC 117 V, AC 230 V or AC 240 V Power Consumption 13 W (117 V) 14 W (230, 240 V) 147 Specification Input/Output Standard fig.spec Input Standard (Volume: center) Input Input Sense Rated Input Level Non Clip Max Input Level MIC Input Jack -55 dBu -40 dBu -42 dBu 2 kohms 1 kohms or less Line Input Jack -15 dBu 0 dBu +2 dBu 20 kohms (stereo) 2 kohms or less Non Clip Max Output Level Output Impedance Recommended Load Impedance 500 ohms 600 ohms or more 100 ohms 30 ohms or more Output Standard Output Input Impedance Recommended Source Impedance (Volume: center) Rated Output Level Audio output Jack +4 dBu +6 dBu Headphone Jack ---------- 90 mW+90 mW *1 * 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms *1: 100 ohms with both channels loaded Dimentions 430.0 41.0 3.5 16.2 197.8 231.4 17.4 44.0 45.3 1.3 482.0 * Dimensions are with card inserted and rubber feet (included) attached. * The power cord is not included. 148 Index A N AR-LINK .................................................................21, 122 AR-LINK Connectors ..................................................137 Attenuation ...................................................................125 Note Trigger ..................................................................109 No-voltage/Make-contact .............................................85 B Pattern Phrases ...............................................................61 Phrase Combine ..............................................................69 Phrase Convert ...............................................................72 Phrase Copy ....................................................................67 Phrase Delete ...................................................................66 Phrase Divide ..................................................................68 Phrase Name ...................................................................60 Phrase Truncate ..............................................................67 Play Volume ....................................................................54 Playback Point ................................................................56 Program Playback ..........................................................89 Baud Rate ......................................................................118 Binary Playback ..............................................................92 Busy Out ........................................................................102 C Card Audio Recording Time Chart ...........................133 Card Conversion Chart .................................................80 Card Convert ..................................................................78 Card Copy .......................................................................76 Card Delete .....................................................................76 Card Name ......................................................................78 Card Protect ....................................................................77 Control Input Mode .......................................................87 Control Input/Output Terminals ..............................136 Control Out .............................................................59, 104 Conversion Error Chart .................................................80 D Delay Time ......................................................................55 Direct Playback ...............................................................86 Dual Mono Mode .........................................................119 E Edge ............................................................................93, 95 Elapsed Time ...................................................................52 Equalizer ........................................................................125 EZ SETUP ........................................................................24 F Fade ..................................................................................58 format ...............................................................................30 Frame Rate ....................................................................113 P R RDAC ...............................................................................43 RDAC-Grade ...................................................................44 RDAC-Mode ...................................................................45 Recording Level ..............................................................49 Remaining Time .............................................................52 Repeat Play ......................................................................57 RS-232C ............................................................20, 118, 136 S SCRUB ..............................................................................54 Setting Copy ....................................................................77 Song Phrases ...................................................................64 T Terminal Recording .......................................................98 Time Stretch ....................................................................71 Trigger Recording ..........................................................48 I Input Volume Thru ......................................................126 L Level ...........................................................................93, 95 Line Thru .......................................................................124 Loop Play .........................................................................57 M MIDI Device ID ............................................................111 MIDI Implementation ..................................................138 MIDI Note Map ............................................................107 MIDI Note Out .............................................................110 MIDI Output ...................................................................84 MIDI Phrases ..................................................................82 MIDI Receive Channel .................................................108 MIDI Time Base ..............................................................83 MMC ..............................................................................110 MTC ................................................................................112 MTC Error Level ..........................................................116 149 Information When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below. AFRICA CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD PANAMA ITALY JORDAN SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. AMMAN Trading Agency EGYPT Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E, #02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980 TEL: 243 9555 Roland Italy S. p. A. Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA TEL: (507) 315-0101 Viale delle Industrie 8, 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY TEL: (02) 937-78300 Prince Mohammed St. P.O. Box 825 Amman 11118 JORDAN TEL: (06) 4641200 Al Fanny Trading Office P.O. Box 2904, El Horrieh Heliopolos, Cairo, EGYPT TEL: (02) 4185531 REUNION Maison FO - YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann, Chaudron - BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex, REUNION ISLAND TEL: 28 29 16 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TEL: (02) 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co. , Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA 330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2, Bangkok 10100, THAILAND TEL: (02) 2248821 That Other Music Shop (PTY) Ltd. VIETNAM 11 Melle St., Braamfontein, Johannesbourg Republic of SOUTH AFRICA P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (011) 403 4105 Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd. 17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont 7700 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA P.O. Box 23032 Claremont, Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA, 7735 TEL: (021) 674 4030 ASIA CHINA Beijing Xinghai Musical Instruments Co., Ltd. 6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang District, Beijing, CHINA TEL: (010) 6774 7491 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. Service Division 22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, HONG KONG TEL: 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. 409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai-400011, INDIA TEL: (022) 498 3079 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL: (021) 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho-Dong, Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA TEL: (02) 3486-8855 MALAYSIA Bentley Music SDN BHD 140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA TEL: (03) 2443333 PHILIPPINES G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Makati, Metro Manila 1200, PHILIPPINES TEL: (02) 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive, SINGAPORE 387381 TEL: 748-1669 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira Edeficio, El Dorado Planta Baja Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL: 595-21-492147 PERU VIDEO Broadcast S.A. Portinari 199 (ESQ. HALS), San Borja, Lima 41, REP. OF PERU TEL: 51-14-758226 Saigon Music URUGUAY 138 Tran Quang Khai St., District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL: (08) 844-4068 Cuareim 1844, Montevideo, URUGUAY, CP11200 TEL: 5982-924-2335 AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Todo Musica S.A. VENEZUELA Roland Corporation (NZ) Ltd. Roland Brasil Ltda. R. Coronel Octaviano da Silveira 203 05522-010 Sao Paulo BRAZIL TEL: (011) 3743 9377 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A/S Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL: (039)16 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK, Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St. Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL: 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As, Filial Finland Lauttasaarentie 54 B Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND TEL: (9) 682 4020 Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Notre YY Alameda, Juan Pablo 2, No. 4010 San Salvador, EL SALVADOR TEL: (503) 262-0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F. MEXICO TEL: (525) 668 04 80 Av. Corona No. 202 S.J. Guadalajara, Jalisco Mexico C.P.44100 MEXICO TEL: (3) 613 1414 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL FBS LINES Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg., 1st Floor SAUDI ARABIA RUSSIA P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL: (03) 898 2081 Slami Music Company Roland Scandinavia A/S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (08) 702 0020 Gerberstrasse 5, Postfach, CH-4410 Liestal, SWITZERLAND TEL: (061) 921 1615 UKRAINE TIC-TAC Mira Str. 19/108 P.O. Box 180 295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE TEL: (03131) 414-40 UNITED KINGDOM Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (01792) 700139 HUNGARY CYPRUS Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (23) 511011 IRELAND Audio House, Belmont Court, Donnybrook, Dublin 4. Republic of IRELAND TEL: (01) 2603501 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd. (Head Office) Roland Canada Music Ltd. (Toronto Office) Unit 2, 109 Woodbine Downs Blvd, Etobicoke, ON M9W 6Y1 CANADA TEL: (0416) 213 9707 U. S. A. Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938, U. S. A. TEL: (323) 890 3700 Moon Stores 155, New National Road 26422 Patras, GREECE TEL: 061-435400 Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg., No. 14, Grand Floor DUBAI U.A.E. TEL: (04) 3360715 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL: (0604) 270 6626 Roland (U.K.) Ltd. Bab Al Bahrain Road, P.O. Box 20077 State of BAHRAIN TEL: 211 005 Siraselviler cad.Guney is hani 8486/6, Taksim. Istanbul. TURKEY TEL: (0212) 2499324 Zak Electronics & Musical Instruments Co. L.L.C. Roland (Switzerland) AG Musitronic AG BAHRAIN Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti U.A.E. SWITZERLAND GREECE Intermusica Ltd. TURKEY SWEDEN MIDDLE EAST STOLLAS S.A. Music Sound Light Khaled Ibn Al Walid St. P.O. Box 13520 Damascus - SYRIA TEL: (011) 2235 384 Calle Bolivia 239, 08020 Barcelona, SPAIN TEL: (93) 308 1000 Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt, GERMANY TEL: (040) 52 60090 Roland Ireland La Casa Wagner de Guadalajara s.a. de c.v. P.O. Box 62, DOHA QATAR TEL: 4423-554 Technical Light & Sound Center CHILE EL SALVADOR RUA DE SANTA CARARINA 131/133, 4000-450 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL: (022) 208 4456 Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio & Stores) Roland Electronics de España, S. A. GERMANY Avenida Rancagua #0330 Providencia Santiago, CHILE TEL: 56-2-373-9100 QATAR Tecnologias Musica e Audio, Roland Portugal, S.A. Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74, A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA TEL: (0512) 26 44 260 Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, San Jose, COSTA RICA TEL: (506)258-0211 Comercial Fancy S.A. PORTUGAL SYRIA CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA BRAZIL P.O. Box 16-5857 Gergi Zeidan St. Chahine Building, Achrafieh Beirut, LEBANON TEL: (01) 335799 SPAIN Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel (Westerlo) BELGIUM TEL: (014) 575811 Florida 656 2nd Floor Office Number 206A Buenos Aires ARGENTINA, CP1005 TEL: (54-11) 4- 393-6057 UL. Gibraltarska 4. PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL: (022) 679 44 19 Roland Austria GES.M.B.H. BELGIUM/HOLLAND/ LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N. V. Instrumentos Musicales S.A. A. Chahine & Fils Sadojava-Triumfalnaja st., 16 103006 Moscow, RUSSIA TEL: 095 209 2193 97 Mt. Eden Road, Mt. Eden, Auckland 3, NEW ZEALAND TEL: (09) 3098 715 ARGENTINA LEBANON P. P. H. Brzostowicz Plata Libertatii 1. RO-4200 Cheorgheni TEL: (066) 164-609 AUSTRIA Abdullah Salem Street, Safat KUWAIT TEL: 5719499 POLAND Av. Francisco de Miranda, Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL: (02) 285 9218 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West. NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL: (02) 9982 8266 Easa Husain Al-Yousifi Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL: 273 0074 ROMANIA EUROPE KUWAIT Roland Scandinavia Avd. Kontor Norge Musicland Digital C.A. Roland Corporation Australia Pty., Ltd. NEW ZEALAND NORWAY Radex Sound Equipment Ltd. 17 Diagorou St., P.O. Box 2046, Nicosia CYPRUS TEL: (02) 453 426 ISRAEL Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Ltd. 8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St. Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL TEL: (03) 6823666 As of November 1, 2000 (Roland) For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC. For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: – Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit. For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. AVIS Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. 02235201 ’01-1-C2-11N
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement